Enjoyable Sanskrit Grammar Series Volume 1 Basic Structure ... · • Relevant books – Enjoyable Sanskrit Grammar Volume 1 Basic Structure of the Language For derived nominal bases

Enjoyable Sanskrit Grammar Series

Volume 1 Basic Structure of the Language

Editor : Medhā Michika, AVG, Anaikatti

E-Published by:

Arsha Avinash Foundation 104 Third Street, Tatabad, Coimbatore 641012, India

Phone: + 91 9487373635 E mail: [email protected]

www.arshaavinash.in

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.arshaavinash.in/

Basic

Basic StructStruct

Medhā MichikaAVG Anaikkatti, 201

Volume

Structure of the Language


��

Volume

re of the Language


Volume 1 re of the Language


re of the Language

Medhā Michika 6

re of the Language

re of the Language

Copyright © 2016 by Medhā Michika All rights reserved. The contents of this work may not in any shape or form be reproduced without permission from Medhā Michika. All profit from the sales of this book goes towards the activities initiated by Śrī Pūjya Svamī Dayānanda Sarasvatī. Electronic version of this book is available at: Arsha Avinash Foundation www.arshaavinash.in Printed version of this book is available at: Arsha Vidya Gurukulam, Coimbatore, TN, India www.arshavidya.in Swami Dayananda Ashram, Rishikesh, UK, India www.dayananda.org Arsha Vidya Gurukulam, Saylorsburg, PA, USA www.arshavidya.org Amazon of your country www.amazon.com etc. (Search by “medha michika”) Tutorial videos to accompany this series of books will soon be available online. Search YouTube under "Medha Sanskrit".

i

Books on Sanskrit Grammar

By Medhā Michika

1. The Script

Devanāgarī (Sanskrit alphabet)

Study Book

Volume 1 Single letters

Volume 2 Conjunct consonants & Exercises on mantras

and ślokas

2. Basic Sanskrit Grammar

(Sufficient to allow the student to read ślokas and commentaries on Śrīmad Bhagavad Gītā)

Enjoyable Sanskrit Grammar

Volume 1 Basic Structure of the Language

Volume 1 Basic Structure of the Language - Workbook

Volume 2 Phonetics & Sandhi

Volume 3 Derivatives (Pañcav6ttaya7)

3. Reference Books

Dhātukośa7 (A Dictionary of Verbal Roots)

A:;ādhyāyī-sūtrapā;ha7 (List of Pā=ini-Sūtra)

4. Grammatical Analysis

Rāmodantam (A story of Śrī Rāma)

Grammatical Analysis of

Śrīmad Bhagavad Gītā

Volume 1 Tvampada-vicāra7 (Chapter 1 – 6)

Volume 2 Tatpada-vicāra7 (Chapter 7 – 12)

Volume 3 Aikya-vicāra7 (Chapter 13 – 18)

5. Advanced Study in Pā=ini-Sūtra

Study Guide to Pā=ini-Sūtra

through Laghusiddhāntakaumudī

Volume 1 - 10

ii

Grammatical Analysis Steps, and the Corresponding Books

The primary objective of studying Sanskrit Grammar is to understand the basic unit of

the language, the sentence. The basic steps required to do this, and the relevant books in this

series, are;

Step 1:

• Remove sandhi (phonetic change) between words of the sentence.

• Relevant books – Enjoyable Sanskrit Grammar Volume 2 Phonetics & Sandhi

Optionally accompanied by – A:;ādhyāyī-sūtrapā;ha7 (List of Pā=ini-Sūtra)

Step 2:

• Identify the verb, and ascertain the verbal root, suffix, and meaning.

• Relevant books – Enjoyable Sanskrit Grammar Volume 1 Basic Structure of the Language

For meaning of root, or root with prefix – Dhātukośa7 (A Dictionary of Verbal Roots)

For derived roots – Enjoyable Sanskrit Grammar Volume 3 Derivatives (Pañcav6ttaya7)

Step 3:

• Determine the relationship of each noun to the verb.

Ascertain the nominal bases and suffixes, and the corresponding meanings.

• Relevant books – Enjoyable Sanskrit Grammar Volume 1 Basic Structure of the Language

For derived nominal bases – Enjoyable Sanskrit Grammar Volume 3 Derivatives

(Pañcav6ttaya7)

These steps are demonstrated in the Grammatical Analysis series.

Once the student has become comfortable with reading Sanskrit sentences, one may

wish to commence the study of Pā=ini-Sūtra. This sets the mind in alignment with the minds

of the 6i:is for deeper understanding of the scriptures.

• Relevant books

- A:;ādhyāyī-sūtrapā;ha7 (List of Pā=ini-Sūtra)

- Study Guide to Pā=ini-Sūtra through Laghusiddhānta-kaumudī- Volume 1 - 10

iii

Preface ��L MNOP QR�S [śrīgurubhyo nama7] (Salutations to my teachers)

This book is the revision of the book “Sanskrit Grammar for Vedanta Students”. I changed the title to “Enjoyable Sanskrit Grammar” because the more I teach the more I find

that the impediment in learning Sanskrit is not intellectual, but psychological. As repeatedly emphasized by my respected guru, Śrī Pūjya Svamī Dayānanda Sarasvatī, it is important to be relaxed and make the study enjoyable.

In this book the presentation of the topics is based purely on the tradition, but at the same time I have tried to make it easily understandable by the student in the modern scheme.

Throughout this series of grammar books, the knowledge of Sanskrit grammar is presented for understanding, rather than just memorizing. Only when the grammar and Pā=ini’s system to explain the grammar are understood, can one fully enjoy the language and the knowledge given through it.

This series of books is therefore useful not only for students of scriptures in Sanskrit, but also for those who just want to gain an overview of the linguistics aspect of the Sanskrit language.

My prayers to all the students of all the scriptures of this great culture of India. R Z[\ Michika

September 2016, AVG Anaikkatti

Preface to “Sanskrit Grammar for Vedanta Students” ��L MNOP QR�S (Salutations to my teachers)

I began my study of Sanskrit in Rishikesh in 2007 while I was staying at the Swami Dayananda Ashram. As a student in a 3 year course in Vedanta and Sanskrit from 2010 to 2013 at Arsha Vidya Gurukulam, Anaikkatti, Tamil Nadu, India, I often tutored my classmates in reading ^\_R ` and understanding the usage of Sanskrit language by aZb\c\d\e fs (traditional teachers of Vedanta). I learned from this experience what works and what does not work in the presentation of Sanskrit grammar. Since existing Sanskrit textbooks are not well suited to the particular needs of Vedanta students, I decided to write this book. gh[i\j� (Who is this book for)

This book is intended primarily for those whose purpose in studying Sanskrit is to understand the usage of Sanskrit employed by traditional teachers in unfolding the vision of Vedanta. The

iv

approach taken in this series of textbooks is based on a clear conceptual understanding of Sanskrit grammar that can be directly applied to Vedanta teaching and its texts. Thus, it should be useful for beginners as well as more experienced students, and can serve as a resource for teachers in need of systematic, clear, and thorough materials. hake� (The subject matter of this textbook)

This series of textbooks is an introduction to classical Sanskrit grammar, the main sourcebook of which is the work of Sage Pā=ini.

The first volume covers mainly syntax, giving students the tools needed to analyze basic Sanskrit sentences, including the fundamentals of hlmcR ` (verbs) and n MocR ` (nouns), and the formation and function of each word in a sentence as it relates to a verb in terms of its i\jiR ` (factor of action) and ha^hp� (case ending). Students should be able to start reading relatively simple Vedanta scriptures within a few months.

The subsequent volumes will cover qraste� (five types of derivatives, i.e., is l-lhul-nR\n-viwZk-nQ\xc[\la�) so that the student can grasp these grammatically derived words and hayz\� (explanatory sentences) heavily used by aZb\c\d\e fs in both oral and written teachings, including ^\_R `. Another volume will provide a thorough introduction to Pā=ini sūtra, which develops clarity in thinking and facilitates communication with traditional teachers of Vedanta. This series of textbooks offers the following useful features, which are not found in other materials: 1) Organization by grammatical topics – gives the student a good grasp on the overall structure of

the language, and enables the books to be used for reference. 2) Differentiation of the concepts of i\jiR ` and ha^hp� – These fundamental concepts are essentially

distinct, yet have not been clearly presented in other textbooks. To establish conceptual clarity, I introduced the various relationships that are embodied in the i\jis first in English before dealing with the mechanics of noun formation and declension in Sanskrit.

3) Clear terminology – I have seen that loose usage of grammatical terms at the beginning will create problems later. Terminology and explanations in this textbook are consistent with those in Pā=ini-sūtras.

4) Vocabulary selected especially for students of Vedanta – The vocabulary words taught in this book are selected from vocabulary often encountered in the teaching of Vedanta. This will facilitate students’ rapid access to original Vedanta texts, and eliminate the unnecessary exercise of memorizing lists of words unlikely to ever be actually needed.

5) Early introduction of pronouns – The declensions of gi\j\c-nafQ\R (a-ending pronouns) as well as lb, eb, vlb, and hiR ` are very similar to the declension of j\R. Since these related words are heavily used in the language, I introduce them together with j\R-w{ near the beginning of the lessons. This has never been done in other textbooks. The usage of relative pronouns is thoroughly introduced with explanation and exercises for practise.

6) Clear, progressive exercises – give students the practise they need to learn and develop their skills, and give teachers a way to track students’ progress.

v

7) Visually clear presentation - The organization of materials makes the information accessible to those who have gone through modern education systems.

|eP}QR ` (The expected result of this textbook) In the course of completing volume 1, along with the Sandhi Handbook, the following results can be expected: 1) A clear and systematic method of parsing sentences will be acquired and practised. 2) Students will be able to start analysing simple verses and prose within a few months. 3) From the beginning of the study, students’ understanding and appreciation of Vedanta classes

will be enhanced because technical terms are introduced from the beginning. 4) Later, transition to the study of grammar as it is presented by Pā=ini-sūtras will be seamless.

n�� (The relationship between the study of this book and expected results) Students and teachers can simply follow the study guide provided from page 97 to attain the expected results.1

Successful study of Sanskrit requires cognitive capacity, consistent effort, and the grace of ��j. Personal growth and emotional maturity are necessary in order to have a mind that is available for the study of Vedanta and Sanskrit. Prayers should be continued to earn that grace. August 2014, AVG Anaikkatti R Z[\ Michika

1 Of the edition of “Sanskrit Grammar for Vedanta Students”.

vi

vii

Table of Contents

Prayers 1

Topic I - Letters/Sounds 3

Topic II - Structure of the Sanskrit Language 5

Building Blocks of the Sanskrit Language 5

Topic III - Factors of action (i\jiR) 11

Basic concepts of i\jiR ` [kārakam] (Factors of action) 11

1. il\ f [kartā] (Agent of action) 12

2. iR f [karma] (Object of action) 13

3. ij�R ` [kara=am] (Instrument of action) 14

4. n�b\QR ` [sampradānam] (Recipient of action) 15

5. gq\b\QR ` [apādānam] (Origin of action) 16

6. gh[ij�R ` [adhikara=am] (Locus of action) 18

Topic IV - The Concept of Verbs (hlmcR ` [ti�antam]) 19

1. What is verb (hlmcR ` [ti�antam])? 19

2. Constituents of verb (hlmcR ` [ti�antam]) 19

3. Classifications of [\l M [dhātu] (verbal root) 21

4. Ten �i\js [lakāra]s 23

5. Verbal suffix (hlm-|�e� [ti�-pratyaya7]) 26

6. Objectives of learning hlmcR ` 28

7. Summary – the formation of hlmcR ` 29

8. Steps in formation of hlmcR ` 30

Topic V - Conjugation in �� (present tense) 31

1. �� in il fhj |ePL� (Active Voice) with qj��qb� [\l M� (Parasmaipadī dhātu7) 32

2. Consulting [\l MiPw� [dhātukośa7] 35

3. �qnL\ f� [upasargā7] (Verbal prefixes) 36

4. �� in il fhj |ePL� (Active Voice) with ��Q Zqb� [\l M� (Ātmanepadī dhātu7) 37

viii

5. �� in il fhj |ePL� (Active Voice) with common [\l Ms 40

6. �� in iR fh� |ePL� (Passive Voice) 43

7. ^\a Z |ePL� (Impersonal Voice) 44

Topic VI - Conjugation in other �i\js 45

1. h�� (Perfect Past Tense) 46

2. �� (First Future Tense) 48

3. �s� (Second Future Tense) 50

4. �P� (Imperative Mood) 52

5. �m (Simple Past Tense) 55

6. hah[h�m (Potential Mood) 58

7. �w�h�fm (Benedictive Mood) 61

8. �m (General Past Tense) 63

9. �sm (Conditional Mood) 65

Topic VII - The Concept of Nouns (n MocR ` [subantam]) 67

1. What is noun (n MocR ` [subantam])? 67

2. Constituents of noun (n MocR ` [subantam]) 67

3. Classification of |\hlqhbi [prātipadika] 69

4. Nominal suffix (n Mq-|�e� [sup-pratyaya7]) 72

5. Objectives of learning n MocR ` 73

Topic VIII - Meanings of case endings (ha^��\ f� [vibhaktyarthā7]) 74

Basic concepts of ha^hp� [vibhakti7] (case ending) 74

1. |�R\ ha^hp� (First Case) 76

2. h�l�e\ ha^hp� (Second Case) 77

3. lsl�e\ ha^hp� (Third Case) 78

4. dl M�� ha^hp� (Fourth Case) 79

5. qrR� ha^hp� (Fifth Case) 80

6. k�� ha^hp� (Sixth Case) 83

7. n�R� ha^hp� (Seventh Case) 84

8. Summary table of ha^��\ f� 86

ix

Topic IX - Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns 87

1. g-ending in q M�h�� (masculine) – j\R [rāma] 89

2. g-ending Pronouns in q M�h�� (masculine) – na f [sarva] 93

3. Other Pronouns in q M�h�� (masculine) – lb, eb, vlb, hiR ` 95

4. g-ending in Qq M�nih�� (neuter) – �\Q [j=āna] 99

5. g-ending Pronouns in Qq M�nih�� (neuter) – na f [sarva] 100

6. Other Pronouns in Qq M�nih�� (neuter) – lb, eb, vlb, hiR ` 101

7. �/�-ending in q M�h�� (masculine) – zhj [hari]/L MN [guru] 103

8. �-ending in q M�h�� (masculine) – ils f [kart6] 106

9. �-ending in ��h�� (feminine) – L�\ [ga�gā] 109

10. �-ending Pronouns in ��h�� (feminine) – na\ f [sarvā] 111

11. Other Pronouns in ��h�� (feminine) – lb, eb, vlb, hiR ` 112

12. �-ending in ��h�� (feminine) – Qb� [nadī] 114

13. �-ending in ��h�� (feminine) – Rhl [mati] 116

14. Pronoun – �bR ` [idam] 118

15. Pronoun – gbn ` [adas] 120

16. Pronouns – e M b [yu:mad], g�b [asmad] 122

17. Referring to the same object again (g¡\bZw� [anvādeśa7]) with �bR/vlb 124

Topic X - Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases 125

Common steps in declension of z�c (consonant-ending) |\hlqhbi (nominal base) 125

1. �-ending in q M�h�� (masculine)/��h�� (feminine) – n ML� ` [suga=] 128

2. l/b/[/^-ending in q M�h�� (masculine)/��h�� (feminine) – RNl ` [marut] 130

3. d/}-ending in q M�h�� (masculine)/��h�� (feminine) – �d ` [6c] 133

4. �Q-ending in q M�h��/��h�� – ePhLQ ` [yogin]/ePhLQ� [yoginī] 134

5. Rl/al-ending in q M�h��/��h�� – ^Lal ` [bhagavat]/^Lal� [bhagavatī] 136

6. wls¢-ending in q M�h��/��h�� – nl ` [sat]/nl� [satī] 138

7. gQ-ending in q M�h�� (masculine) – ��Q ` [ātman] 140

8. gQ-ending in Qq M�nih�� (neuter) – £¤Q ` [brahman] 142

9. gn-ending in Qq M�nih�� (neuter) – RQn ` [manas] 144

x

10. �k/�k-ending in Qq M�nih�� (neuter) – ¥Phlk ` [jyoti:]/d¦ Mk ` [cak:u:] 146

11. gn-ending in q M�h�� (masculine) – d§Rn ` [candramas] 148

Topic XI - Nouns in Apposition (nR\Q\h[ij�R ` [samānādhikara=am]) 149

Topic XII – Indeclinables (gëR ` [avyayam]) 152

gës derived from [\l M 155

gës derived from na fQ\Rs 157

Appendix 159

Exercises 161

Worksheets for photocopying 186

1

Prayers

© om

wMª\�j[j� ha« M� whwa�¬ dl M Mf}R ` S |nabQ� ®\e Zl ` na fha¯Pqw\ceZ °±°

śuklāmbaradhara� vi��u� śaśivar�a� caturbhujam |

prasannavadana� dhyāyet sarvavighnopaśāntaye ||1||

nj²hl QR³MO� ajbZ i\R´hqh� S hax\jµ� ihj_\hR hnhu^ fal M R Z nb\ °¶°

sarasvati namastubhya� varade kāmarūpi�i |

vidyārambha� kari�yāmi siddhirbhavatu me sadā ||2||

eZQ\¦jnR\·\eRh[L¸ RzZ�j\l ` S is ¹� ¨\ij�� |Pp� l�� q\h�QeZ QR� °º°

yenāk�arasamāmnāyamadhigamya maheśvarāt |

k&tsna� vyākara�a� prokta� tasmai pā�inaye nama' ||3||

a\»i\j� ajNhd� ^\_i\j� ql¼h�R ` S q\h�hQ � n½¾i\j� d |�lP¿h� R MhQ¾eR ` °À°

vākyakāra� vararuci� bhā�yakāra� patañjalim |

pā�ini� sūtrakāra� ca pra�ato'smi munitrayam ||4||

a\L�\ fhaa nÁspÂ a\L� f|hlqteZ S }Ll� hqljÂ aÃZ q\a fl�qjRZ�jÂ °Ä°

vāgarthāviva samp&ktau vāgarthapratipattaye |

jagata' pitarau vande pārvatīparameśvarau ||5||

© w\hc� w\hc� w\hc� ° om śānti' śānti' śānti' ||

2

Meaning of the prayers:

1. For the removal of all obstacles, may one meditate upon Ga=eśa, who wears white

garment, who is all pervasive, whose complexion is like moon, who has four arms, and

who has smiling face.

2. Sarasvatī! My salutations to you. The one who gives boons! The one who has beautiful

form! I will start my study. May success be with me all the time.

3. My salutations to Pā=ini, by whom the entire grammar system has been taught after

receiving Māheśvarasūtra from Śiva.

4. I remain saluting to three sages: Vararuci, the author of Vārtika, Patañjali, the author of

Mahābhā:ya, and Pā=ini, the author of Pā=ini-sūtra.

5. For proper understanding of the meaning of words, I salute Pārvatī and Parameśvara,

the parents of jagat, who are non-separate like the word and its meaning.

May the obstacles pertaining to my body-mind-sense-complex, to other beings around

me, and to the natural environments, be removed.

Assignment on Prayer:

� Write all the ślokas (verses) of the prayer in both Devanagarī and transliteration (i.e.

using this Romanized script, as on page 1).

� Try to memorize all the ślokas (verses) of the prayer.

Topic I – Letters/Sounds

3

Topic I

Letters/Sounds

Sanskrit is a sound-based language.

In Sanskrit, unlike English, there is a perfect one-to-one correspondence between

what is written (letter) and what is pronounced (sound). Any script can be used in

Sanskrit as long as this one-to-one correspondence between letter and sound is

maintained. The most commonly used script for Sanskrit is called Devanāgarī.

Chart 1: Letters used in Sanskrit

Class Category

1st of the

class

2nd of the

class

3rd of the

class

4th of the

class

5th / nasals

Semi vowels

Sibilants Vowels

Gutturals i ka

Æ kha

L ga

Ç gha

m .a

z

ha

g / � a / ā

Palatals d ca

È cha

} ja

É jha

Ê ña

e ya

w śa

� / � i / ī

Cerebrals � 0a

Ë 0ha

Ì 1a

Í 1ha

� �a

j ra

k �a

� / Î

& / 2

Dentals l ta

� tha

b da

[ dha

Q na

� la

n sa

Ï 3

Labials q pa

Ð pha

o ba

^ bha

R ma

a va

� / Ñ u / ū

To facilitate pronunciation, g [a] has been added after each consonant in this chart.

Diphthongs: v e, Ò ai, Ó o, Ô au

Special letters/sounds which come after vowel: Õ� Ö (anusvāra7), Õ� 7 (visarga7)

Topic I – Letters/Sounds

4

Letters/Sounds:

1. Vowels:

There are nine vowels in Sanskrit:

• 5 simple vowels – short form: g, �, �, �, Ï

(long form: �, �, Ñ, Î)

• 4 diphthongs – long v, Ó, Ò, Ô

Note that short vowel is called ×²� [hrasva7] and long vowel is called b�Ç f� [dīrgha7].

g, v, and Ó are termed L M�� [gu=a7]. �, Ò, and Ô are termed ashu� [v6ddhi7].

2. Consonants:

There are thirty-three consonants in Sanskrit.

• 25 consonants = 5 categories x 5 classes (from i to R)

• 4 semivowels (e `, j, �, a)

• 4 sibilants (w `, k `, n `, z)

3. gQ M²\j� [anusvāra7]

The nasal sound which is represented by a dot above a vowel, or “Ö”. E.g., g�w M� [aÖśu7]

4. hanL f� [visarga7]/han} fQ�e� [visarjanīya7]

The aspirated guttural sound which is represented by “:” or “7” after a vowel.

E.g., j\R� [rāma7], j\R\� [rāmā7], j\R �� [rāmai7], zhj� [hari7], zjZ� [hare7], L MN� [guru7], etc.

Symbols in Devanāgarī script:

z�c� [halanta7] : A stroke below a consonant, indicating that the consonant stands by

itself without any vowel following it. E.g., i [k] l ` [t] etc.

bÙÌ� [da=Úa7] : A vertical line which indicates the end of a sentence or one section of a

verse. A double line indicates the end of a verse or paragraph. E.g., j\RP LÛhl S �Ü�Ý °

Assignment on Letters/Sounds:

� Get familiar with Devanāgarī. If needed, use Devanāgarī Studybook volume 1 and 2.

� Add these words to your vocabulary: ×²� [hrasva7], b�Ç f� [dīrgha7], L M�� [gu=a7], ashu�

[v6ddhi7], gQ M²\j� [anusvāra7], hanL f� [visarjanīya7].

Topic II – Structure of Sanskrit Language

5

Topic II

Structure of the Sanskrit Language

Building Blocks of the Sanskrit Language

� A sentence (a\»R ` [vākyam]) is a unit of expression to communicate an idea.

E.g. “j\R� aQ� LÛhl S [rāma7 vanaÖ gacchati] (Rāma goes to the forest.)”

is a sentence (a\»R ` [vākyam]).

� A a\»R ` consists of a word (qbR ` [padam]) or words (qb\hQ [padāni]).2

E.g., In the sentence above, there are three words (qb\hQ [padāni]).

1. j\R� [rāma7] (Rāma); 2. aQR ` [vanam] (to the forest); 3. LÛhl [gacchati] (goes)

2 qbR ` [padam] is a form in singular, while qb\hQ [padāni] is a form in plural.

a\»R ` [vākyam] (sentence)

qbR ` [padam]

(word)

qb\hQ [padāni] (words)

qbR ` [padam] (word)

qbR ` [padam] (word)


6

� In the Sanskrit language, there are only two types of words:

1. Verb (hlmc� qbR ` [ti�antaÖ padam]; literally “word ending with ti�-suffix”)

E.g. LÛhl [gacchati] (goes)

2. Noun (n Moc� qbR ` [subantaÖ padam]; literally “word ending with sup-suffix”)

E.g. j\R� [rāma7] (Rāma); aQR ` [vanam] (to the forest)

� Every word in Sanskrit is comprised of two basic constituents:

Original entity (|is hl� [prak6ti7]) + Suffix (|�e� [pratyaya7])

E.g. word = original entity + suffix 3

j\R� = j\R (Rāma) + n ` (agent/singular)

aQR ` = aQ (forest) + gR ` (object/singular)

LÛhl = LR ` (to go) + hl (present/active/

3rd person/singular)

This concept is used by Sage Pā=ini, the grammarian who established a meta-

language to explain the whole Sanskrit grammar.

3 Suffix is a grammatical term for a group of letters which is attached after an original entity.

Suffix modifies the meaning or form of the original entity.

|is hl� [prak6ti7] (original entity)

|�e� [pratyaya7] (suffix)

+ = qbR ` [padam]

(word)


7

� With that concept, the constituents of a word (qbR ` [padam]) are explained as follows:

1. Verb (hlmc� qbR ` [ti�antaÖ padam]) :

As for verb, the original entity (|is hl� [prak6ti7]) is verbal root ([\l M� [dhātu7]),

which indicates action. The suffix (|�e� [pratyaya7]) is verbal suffix (hlm-|�e� [ti�-

pratyaya7]), which indicates tense or mood, voice, person, and number.

verb (hlmc� qbR ` [ti�antaÖ padam])

= root ([\l M� [dhātu7]) + verbal suffix (hlm-|�e� [ti�-pratyaya7])

E.g.,

LÛhl = LR ` + hl

LÛhl (he goes) = LR ` (to go) + hl (present/active/3rd person/singular)

LÛhl (he goes) is a verb (hlmc� qbR ` [ti�antaÖ padam]).

LR ` (to go) is verbal root ([\l M� [dhātu7]).

hl (present/active/3rd person/singular) is verbal suffix (hlm-|�e� [ti�-pratyaya7]).

hlmc� qbR ` [ti�antaÖ padam]

(verb)

[\l M� [dhātu7]

(root)

hlm-|�e� [ti�-pratyaya7] (verbal suffix)

= +


8

2. Noun (n Moc� qbR ` [subantaÖ padam]):

As for noun, the original entity (|is hl� [prak6ti7]) is nominal base (|\hlqhbiR `

[prātipadikam]), which indicates a thing or person. The suffix (|�e� [pratyaya7]) is

nominal suffix (n Mq-|�e� [sup-pratyaya7]), which indicates case and number.4

noun (n Moc� qbR ` [subantaÖ padam])

= nominal base (|\hlqhbiR ` [prātipadikam]) + nominal suffix (n Mq-|�e� [sup-

pratyaya7])

E.g.,

j\R� = j\R + n `

j\R� (Rāma) is a noun (n Moc� qbR ` [subantaÖ padam]).

j\R (Rāma) is nominal base (|\hlqhbiR ` [prātipadikam])

n ` (agent/singular) is nominal suffix (n Mq-|�e� [sup-pratyaya7])

E.g.,

aQR ` = aQ + gR `

aQR ` (to the forest) is a noun (n Moc� qbR ` [subantaÖ padam]).

aQ (forest) is nominal base (|\hlqhbiR ` [prātipadikam])

gR ` (object/singular) is nominal suffix (n Mq-|�e� [sup-pratyaya7])

4 The q ` [p] of n Mq ` [sup] becomes o ` [b] in the word “n MocR” [subantam] because of a sandhi rule,

which is studied in Volume 2 in this series. (Ref. Pā=ini-sūtra 8.2.39)

n Moc� qbR ` [subantaÖ padam]

(noun)

|\hlqhbiR ` [prātipadikam] (nominal base)

n Mq-|�e� [sup-pratyaya7] (nominal suffix)

= +


9

� There are two types of suffix (|�e� [pratyaya7]) to make a word (qbR ` [padam]).

1. Verbal suffix (hlm |�e� [ti� pratyaya7])

There are eighteen verbal suffixes by three persons and three numbers in two

types.

They are called hlm [ti�] because they start with hl [ti] and end with m [�].

Type P Type A

Singular Dual Plural Singular Dual Plural

3rd person hlq ` [tip] ln ` [tas] hÉ [jhi] l [ta] �l\R ` [ātām] É [jha]

2nd person hnq ` [sip] �n ` [thas] � [tha] �\n ` [thās] ��\R ` [āthām] ßR ` [dhvam]

1st person hRq ` [mip] an ` [vas] Rn ` [mas] �� [i;] ahz [vahi] Rhzm [mahi�]

2. Nominal suffix (n Mq ` |�e� [sup pratyaya7])

There are twenty-one nominal suffixes by seven cases and three numbers.

They are called n M¢q ` [sup] because they start with n M¢ [su] and end with q ` [p].

Singular Dual Plural

1st case n M¢ [su] Ô [au] }n ` [jas]

2nd case gR ` [am] Ô� [au;] wn ` [śas]

3rd case �\ [;ā] O\R ` [bhyām] h^n ` [bhis]

4th case mZ [�e] O\R ` [bhyām] On ` [bhyas]

5th case mhn¢ [�asi] O\R ` [bhyām] On ` [bhyas]

6th case mn ` [�as] Ón ` [os] �R ` [ām]

7th case hm [�i] Ón ` [os] n Mq ` [sup]

(The symbol on top of n M¢ and mhn¢ indicates nasal vowel for technical purposes.)

To be used in the language, a word should be technically qualified as qbR `. Thus

every word in Sanskrit language must end with either hlm-|�e or n Mq-|�e. (By

Pā=ini-sūtra 1.4.14 n Mh�mc� qbR ` S)


10

� In every sentence there is one verb (hlmc� qbR ` [ti�antaÖ padam]), written or implied.

o In understanding a sentence (a\»R ` [vākyam]), the verb (hlmc� qbR ` [ti�antaÖ

padam]) should be identified first.

o All other words should be nouns (n Moc� qbR ` [subantaÖ padam]). They are all

connected to the verb, either directly or indirectly.

o By relating each noun to the verb, the meaning of the sentence is understood.

Note:

In this book the word "verb" refers to a hlmcR `, or a "finite verb". A finite verb makes a

sentence complete. Even if a word (qb) is indicating an action, if it does not end with hlm-

|�e, thus ending with n Mq-|�e, that word is considered to be a noun, not a verb. This is

according to the Pā=inian Sanskrit grammar.

Assignment on Structure of Sanskrit Language:

� Add these words to your vocabulary:

1) a\»R ` [vākyam]

2) qbR ` [padam]

3) qb\hQ [padāni]

4) hlmc� qbR ` [ti�antaÖ padam]

5) n Moc� qbR ` [subantaÖ padam]

6) |is hl� [prak6ti7]

7) |�e� [pratyaya7]

8) [\l M� [dhātu7]

9) hlm-|�e� [ti�-pratyaya7]

10) |\hlqhbiR ` [prātipadikam]

11) n Mq-|�e� [sup-pratyaya7]

a\»R ` [vākyam] : sentence

n Moc� qbR `

[subantaÖ padam] (noun)

n Moc� qbR ` [subantaÖ padam]

(noun)

hlmc� qbR ` [ti�antaÖ padam]

(verb)

Topic III – Factors of action (i\jiR)

11

Topic III

Factors of action

i\jiR `

Basic concepts of i\jiR ` [kārakam] (Factors of action)

� With reference to an action, there are many factors which are related to the action.

Sage Pā=ini defined some factors directly related to the action as i\jis.

� i\jis are six in number.

1. il\ f [kartā] (agent of action)

2. iRf [karma] (object of action)

3. ij�R ` [kara=am] (instrument of action)

4. n�b\QR ` [sampradānam] (recipient of action)

5. gq\b\QR ` [apādānam] (origin of action)

6. gh[ij�R ` [adhikara=am] (locus of action)

� Based on how a thing or person is related to a given action, the status of one of the

i\jis can be given to it.

� i\ji and ha^hp [vibhakti] (case endings) are independent concepts. They are not

intrinsically connected.

o i\jis are factors involved in the accomplishment of action.

i\jis are independent from any language. Thus i\ji can be understood

without Sanskrit language.

o ha^hps are nominal suffixes in Sanskrit grammar.

ha^hps can express i\jis as well as things other than i\ji.


12

1. il\ f [kartā] (Agent of action)

� With reference to a given action, the agent, the one who does the action gets a

technical name “il\ f”.

� il\ f is the primary factor related to the action.

e.g., 1) He sees the elephant.

- With reference to the action of seeing,

• He is il\ f.

e.g., 2) They see the elephant.


• They are il\ f.

e.g., 3) Devadatta falls.

- With reference to the action of falling,

• Devadatta is il\ f.

e.g., 4) There are scriptures.

- With reference to the action of being,

• Scriptures are il\ f.

e.g., 5) Devadatta sees Somadatta, who is cooking.



- With reference to the action of cooking,

• Somadatta is il\ f.


13

2. iR f [karma] (Object of action)

� With reference to a given action, the object gets a technical name “iR f”.

e.g., 1) He sees the elephants.


• He is il\ f.

• The elephants are iR f.

e.g., 2) The elephants are seen by him.


• He is il\ f.

• The elephants are iR f.

e.g., 3) Devadatta goes to the village.

- With reference to the action of going,


• The village is iR f.

� A destination of a going or moving action is also considered to be a iR f (object).

e.g., 4) Devadatta sees Somadatta who is cooking the rice.



• Somadatta is iR f.


• Somadatta is il\ f.

• The rice is iR f.


14

3. ij�R ` [kara=am] (Instrument of action)

� With reference to a given action, an instrument/means to accomplish the action gets a

technical name “ij�R”.

e.g., 1) Devadatta eats rice by hand.

- With reference to the action of eating,


• Rice is iR f.

• The hand is ij�R `.

e.g., 2) He goes to the village by bus.


• He is il\ f.


• Bus is ij�R `.

e.g., 3) The bird is seen by him through binoculars.


• He is il\ f.

• The bird is iR f.

• The binoculars are ij�R `.


15

4. n�b\QR ` [sampradānam] (Recipient of action)

� That recipient which the agent wants to connect with the object of the action of giving

gets a technical name “n�b\QR”.

e.g., 1) Devadatta gives money to the priest.

- With reference to the action of giving,


• Money is iR f.

• The priest is n�b\QR `.

� The recipient of other actions, such as teaching, telling, showing, etc., is also n�b\QR `.

e.g., 2) The teacher teaches the scripture to the student.

- With reference to the action of teaching,

• The teacher is il\ f.

• The scripture is iR f.

• The student is n�b\QR `.

e.g., 3) He tells a story to the people.

- With reference to the action of telling,

• He is il\ f.

• A story is iR f.

• The people are n�b\QR `.

e.g., 4) Devadatta gets ready for the journey.

- With reference to the action of getting ready,


• The journey is n�b\QR `.


16

5. gq\b\QR ` [apādānam] (Origin of action)

� With reference to a given action which involves separation, the point from which the

separation takes place gets a technical name “gq\b\QR”.

e.g., 1) An apple falls from the tree.


• An apple is il\ f.

• The tree is gq\b\QR `.

e.g., 2) He goes to the village from a house.


• He is il\ f.


• A house is gq\b\QR `.

e.g., 3) Devadatta falls from a running horse.



• A running horse is gq\b\QR `.

- With reference to the action of running,

• A horse is il\ f.


17

� Something one fears, and something from which one has to protect oneself are also

gq\b\QR `.

e.g., 1) He is afraid of the snake.

- With reference to the action of being afraid,

• He is il\ f.

• The snake is gq\b\QR `.

e.g., 2) Bhagavān protects people from q\q.

- With reference to the action of protecting,

• Bhagavān is il\ f.

• People are iR f.

• q\q is gq\b\QR `.

� Cause of birth is also gq\b\QR `.

e.g., 1) Anger is born of desire.

- With reference to the action of being born,

• Anger is il\ f.

• Desire is gq\b\QR `.

� Teacher in formal learning is also gq\b\QR `.

e.g., 1) Students study the Vedas from the teacher.

- With reference to the action of studying,

• Students are il\ f.

• The Vedas are iR f.

• The teacher is gq\b\QR `.


18

6. gh[ij�R ` [adhikara=am] (Locus of action)

� With reference to a given action, a locus of il\ f or iR f in terms of place (bZw), time (i\�),

subject (hake) gets a technical name “gh[ij�R”.

e.g., 1) He cooks in the kitchen.


• He is il\ f.

• The kitchen is gh[ij�R `.

e.g., 2) He cooks rice in the pan.


• He is il\ f.

• Rice is iR f.

• The pan is gh[ij�R `.

e.g., 3) He swims in the swimming pool in front of the library.

- With reference to the action of swimming,

• He is il\ f.

• The swimming pool is gh[ij�R `.

• The library is a referential point for the word “in front of”. Thus it is not

qualified to be called gh[ij�R `.

e.g., 4) He sleeps at night.

- With reference to the action of sleeping,

• He is il\ f.

• Night is gh[ij�R `.

e.g., 5) In/with reference to RP¦, he has desire.

- With reference to the action of having,

• He is il\ f.

• Desire is iR f.

• RP¦ is gh[ij�R `.

Topic IV – The Concept of Verbs (hlmcR ` [ti�antam])

19

Topic IV

The Concept of

Verbs (hlmcR ` [ti�antam])

It is essential to know the concept of verbs. However, this topic can initially be

deferred by beginners. Topic V – Conjugation in �� can be studied first, and Topic IV –

The Concept of Verbs can be studied later.

1. What is verb (hlmcR ` [ti�antam])?

In Sanskrit language, there are only two types of words, verb (hlmc� qbR ` [ti�antaÖ

padam]) and noun (n Moc� qbR ` [subantaÖ padam]).

Here, verb (hlmcR ` [ti�antam]) is a word (qbR ` [padam]) which is the primary

element in the sentence, in a sense that all nouns are connected to the verb. For example, in

a sentence “He sees an elephant in the forest with his friend.”, the verb “sees” is the

primary element of the sentence and all the nouns are connected to the verb, either

directly or indirectly.

To be exact, hlmcR ` [ti�antam] is a finite verb, which completes a sentence. For

example, in the sentence “He offers melted ghee into burning fire.”, “offers” is the finite

verb, (hlmcR ` [ti�antam]). “Melted” and “burning” are considered to be participles.

Participle is a type of noun which qualifies other nouns in terms of action.

2. Constituents of verb (hlmcR ` [ti�antam])

The literal meaning of hlmcR ` [ti�antam] is that which ends (gc [anta]) with hlm

[ti�]. hlm [ti�] is a type of suffix (|�e� [pratyaya7]), which can be called verbal suffix.

hlmcR ` [ti�antam] consists of two elements:

Verb (hlmcR ` [ti�antam])

= Root ([\l M� [dhātu7]) + Verbal suffix (hlm|�e� [ti�-pratyaya7])


20

A [\l M [dhātu] is the basic element of hlmc. A [\l M indicates only an action. For

example, “^½ [bhū]” is a [\l M and its meaning is “to be”. “áw ` [d6ś]” is another [\l M and its

meaning is “to see”.

By suffixing different verbal suffixes (hlm-|�es) to a [\l M according to person and

number, different forms of verbs (hlmcs) are produced. This is what we call “conjugation

of verb”.

Observe how a verb is conjugated from a single [\l M into nine different forms by

suffixing nine different suffixes according to three types of person and three numbers.

Formation of hlmcR `

That which immediately precedes the suffix is called g� [a�ga] (stem). So, when a

hlm-|�e [ti�-pratyaya] is suffixed to a [\l M [dhātu], the [\l M is given the status of g� [a�ga].

It is the g� which then undergoes any necessary modifications based on the type of [\l M,

tense, etc. hlm|�es also undergo some changes based on the tense, mood, etc.

^½ This is the original [\l M by itself.

([\l M�)

^½ + hlq ` A hlm-|�e is suffixed. Then [\l M gains the status of g�.

(g�R) (|�e�)

^½ + hl There are regulations to modify hlm-|�e according to tense, etc.

â + hl There are regulations to modify g� according to certain factors which

are discussed next.


3rd âhl He is

âl� Those two are

âhc They are

2nd âhn You are

â�� You two are

â� You are

1st â\hR I am

â\a� We two are

â\R� We are

Number

Person

Sing-ular

Dual Plu-ral

3rd person hlq ` ln ` hÉ

2nd person hnq ` �n ` �

1st person hRq ` an ` Rn `

^½ (to be)

= +

hlmcR ` (verbs) hlm|�e� (verbal suffixes) [\l M� (root)


21

3. Classifications of [\l M [dhātu] (Verbal root)

[\l M is the basic element in Sanskrit language and it indicates action itself.

There are about two thousand [\l Ms defined by Pā=ini in a book called [\l Mq\Ë�

[dhātupā;ha7]. In the [\l Mq\Ë�, these [\l Ms are classified in two ways according to the way

they conjugate. They are:

i. Ten groups of conjugations (1st L� to 10th L�)

ii. Three types (P, A, and U)

i. Ten L�s [ga=a]s (groups) of conjugation

When a [\l M is suffixed with a hlm-|�e, thus gaining the status of g� [a�ga], it can

undergo one of ten different modification processes. 5 According to which of these ten

modification processes it intrinsically undergoes, a [\l M is classified into one of ten groups.

In Sanskrit, the word for group is L�. Thus there are ten L�s of [\l Ms called 1st L� to 10th L�.

More than a half of [\l Ms belong to the 1st L� (also called 1st conjugation).

The following chart is presented here just to illustrate that there are ten L�s of [\l Ms

according to the ten different modification processes on g�.

L� In Sanskrit Modification process

L M� on g� Added |�e Special change

1st ã\hb-L�� Yes g -

2nd gb\hb-L�� Yes & No - -

3rd } MzP�\hb-L�� Yes & No - Reduplication

4th hba\hb-L�� No e -

5th ²\hb-L�� No QP/Q M -

6th l Mb\hb-L�� No g -

7th N[\hb-L�� No Q -

8th lQ\hb-L�� Yes Ó/� -

9th å\hb-L�� No Q\/Q ` -

10th d Mj\hb-L�� Yes � This becomes a new [\l M

5 Difference in modification process on g� is seen only when conjugating in active voice (il fhj

|ePL�), and ��, �P�, �m, hah[h�m, and wls/w\Qd `.


22

ii. Three types (P, A, and U)

As seen in the chart below, hlm-|�es [ti�-pratyaya]s are eighteen in number and

they are divided into two padas. The first set of nine suffixes is called Parasmai-pada

(qj��-qb). The second set of nine suffixes is called Ātmane-pada (��Q Z-qb).

hlm-|�es

qj� �-qb [parasmai-pada] ��Q Z-qb [ātmane-pada]





The Parasmai-pada (qj��-qb) are suffixed to some [\l Ms, while Ātmane-pada (��Q Z-

qb) are suffixed to some other [\l Ms. 6

In this book, those [\l Ms which take only Parasmai-pada (qj��-qb) are classified as

type P. Such type of [\l M is called qj��-qb� [parasmai-padī], that which takes qj��-qb.

Those [\l Ms which take only Ātmane-pada (��Q Z-qb) are classified as type A. Such

type of [\l M is called ��Q Z-qb� [ātmane-padī], that which takes ��Q Z-qb.

Those [\l Ms which take both Parasmai-pada (qj��-qb) and Ātmane-pada (��Q Z-qb)

are classified as type U. Such type of [\l M is called �ê-qb� [ubhaya-padī], that which takes

both qb.

For example, ^½ [bhū] is a [\l M [dhātu] indicating the action “to be”, listed in [\l Mq\Ë�

[dhātupā;ha7] under the 1st group (L� [ga=a]), and it is classified as P, qj��-qb� [parasmai-

padī] because it takes only Parasmai-pada (qj��-qb) suffixes. So, in a Sanskrit dictionary, it

is listed as “^½ (1P) to be”. b�q ` [dīp] is another [\l M indicating the action “to shine”, listed

under 4th L�, and it is classified as A, ��Q Z-qb� [ātmane-padī], because it takes only

Ātmane-pada (��Q Z-qb) suffixes. In a dictionary, it is listed as “b�q ` (4A) to shine”. Similary

N[ ` [rudh] is listed as “N[ ` (7U) to obstruct” as it is under 7th L� and takes both sets of

suffixes.

6 This difference in type is seen only in active voice.


23

4. Ten �i\js [lakāra]s

There are ten suffixes called �i\js [lakāra]s. They are:

1. �� [la;]

2. h�� [li;]

3. �� [lu;]

4. �s� [l6;]

5. �P� [lo;]

6. �m [la�]

7. hah[h�m [vidhili�]

8. �w�h�fm [āśīrli�]

9 �m [lu�]

10. �sm [l6�]

Since they all have � [l] in their names, they are conventionally called �i\js

[lakāra]s.

�i\js [lakāra]s are suffixed to a [\l M [dhātu].

E.g., ^½ ([\l M�) + �� (one of the �i\js)

�i\j is to be substituted by hlm-|�e [ti�-pratyaya].

E.g., ^½ ([\l M�) + hlq ` (�� is substituted by one of the hlm-|�es)

Since hlm-|�es are substitutes for �i\j, all verbs (hlmcs) are originally made by

suffixing �i\j to [\l M.

�i\j [lakāra] represents two things.

i. Voice (|ePL� [prayoga7])

ii. Tense and mood

These voice and tense/mood are inherited by hlm-|�e and become a part of the

meaning of the verb. In other words, voice and tense/mood of a verb originate from �i\j.


24

i. Voice (|ePL� [prayoga7])

There are three voices for verb. They are:

a) Active voice (il fhj |ePL� [kartari prayoga7])

b) Passive voice (iR fh� |ePL� [karma=i prayoga7])

c) Impersonal voice (^\aZ |ePL� [bhāve prayoga7])

�i\j denotes/indicates/corresponds to the agent (il\ f [kartā]) or object (iR f [karma])

of the action indicated by [\l M, to which �i\j is suffixed. Occasionally, �i\j also denotes

the action of the [\l M itself.

a) Active voice (il fhj |ePL� [kartari prayoga7])

When a �i\j denotes the agent (il\ f [kartā]) of the action, the voice of verb is called

“active voice”, il fhj |ePL� [kartari prayoga7] in Sanskrit.

For example, to a [\l M “áw ` (to see)”, �i\j is suffixed. When this �i\j denotes the

agent of action of seeing, the verb created by this combination of [\l M and �i\j will be

“qæehl (sees)” and this verb is said to be in active voice, or il fhj |ePL�. This verb

corresponds to the agent. Just as “He sees a bird.”, “They see a bird.”, etc., and “I am.”,

“You are”, “He is”, etc., in English.

b) Passive voice (iR fh� |ePL� [karma=i prayoga7])

When a �i\j denotes the object (iR f [karma]) of the action, the voice of verb is called

“passive voice”, iR fh� |ePL� [karma=i prayoga7] in Sanskrit.

For example, to a [\l M “áw ` (to see)”, �i\j is suffixed. When this �i\j denotes the

object of action of seeing, the verb created by this combination of [\l M and �i\j will be

“áæelZ (is seen)”, and this verb is said to be in passive voice, or iR fh� |ePL�. This verb

corresponds to the object. Just as “The bird is seen by him.”, “These birds are seen by him”,

“The bird is seen by them.”, etc., in English.

c) Impersonal voice (^\aZ |ePL� [bhāve prayoga7])

Since this voice is not seen very often in Sanskrit, and does not exist in English,

explanation of this is deferred for now.


25

ii. Tense and mood

�i\js also express the tense (time) of the action taking place, or mood of the action

(how the action takes place).

The following list shows general usage of ten �i\js in six tenses and four moods.

Note that these usages of tenses and moods are not always strictly observed in the

language.

1. �� can be used in present tense to express that the action is started and not finished yet.

2. h�� can be used in perfect past tense to express that the action is in the past which is

not witnessed by speaker.

3. �� can be used in first future tense to express that the action will be in the future but

not today.

4. �s� can be used in second future tense to express that the action is in the future in

general.

5. �P� can be used in imperative mood to express that the action is command, invitation,

prayer, etc.

6. �m can be used in simple past tense to express that the action is in the past but not

today.

7. hah[h�m can be used in potential mood to express that the action is command, invitation,

prayer, hypothetical, etc.

8. �w�h�fm can be used in benedictive mood to express that the action is wished.

9. �m can be used in general past tense to express that the action is in the past in general.

10. �sm can be used in conditional mood to express that the action could happen,

conditionally.


26

5. Verbal suffix (hlm-|�e� [ti�-pratyaya7])

hlm-|�es [ti�-pratyaya]s are substitutes for �i\j. Thus, hlm-|�es inherit voice as

well as tense/mood from the original �i\j. Because of this, hlm-|�es also denote voice as

well as tense/mood.

hlm-|�es further denote two more things.

i. Person (q MNk� [puru:a7])

ii. Number (adQR ` [vacanam])

i. Person (q MNk� [puru:a7])

There are three persons, as described in the chart below.

Person In Sanskrit Who? Examples

3rd person |�R-q MNk� [prathama-puru:a7] Others he, she, it, they, tree, etc.

2nd person R®R-q MNk� [madhyama-puru:a7] Listener you, you all

1st person �tR-q MNk� [uttama-puru:a7] Speaker I, we

In the traditional Sanskrit grammar, the 3rd person is called |�R-q MNk� (first person)

and listed first because the topic should come first. The speaker comes last (�tR) and the

listener comes in between (R®R).


There are three numbers, as described in the matrix with persons in the chart below.

Number

Person


vi-adQR ` [eka-vacanam]

h�-adQR ` [dvi-vacanam]

oè-adQR ` [bahu-vacanam]

3rd person he, she, it, tree they (two), two trees they (all), trees

2nd person you you (two) you (all)

1st person I we (two) we (all)


27

Two qbs [pada]s

There are eighteen hlm-|�es. As seen in the chart below, they are divided into two

sets of nine. They are:

� qj��-qb [parasmai-pada]

� ��QZ-qb [ātmane-pada]

hlm-|�es

qj� �qb [parasmaipada] ��Q Zqb [ātmanepada]





In active voice, either or both of the qbs are used according to the type of the [\l M.

For example, the [\l M “^½ (1P) to be”, being type P, qj��qb�, takes one of the qj��qb suffixes

in active voice. “b�q ` (4A) to shine”, being type A, ��Q Zqb�, takes one of the ��Q Zqb suffixes

in active voice. “N[ ` (7U) to obstacle”, being type U, �êqb�, takes both qj��qb and ��QZqb

suffixes in active voice.

In passive voice and impersonal voice, only ��Q Zqb suffixes are used regardless of

the type of the [\l M. For example, all [\l Ms such as “^½ (1P) to be”, “b�q ` (4A) to shine”, and “N[ `

(7U) to obstruct” take ��Q Zqb suffixes in passive voice and impersonal voice.


28

6. Objectives of learning hlmcR `

Many different hlmcs can be produced from one [\l M. Ten different �i\js can be

suffixed to a [\l M in ten tenses and moods. Each �i\j has three voices. Then, each �i\j is

multiplied into three persons and three numbers. If the [\l M is type U, in active voice the

whole thing has to be multiplied by two.

1 [\l M

X 10 �i\js (tenses and moods): present, past, future, imperative, etc.

X 2 |ePLs (voices): active, passive

X 3 q MNks (persons): 3rd person, 2nd person, 1st person

X 3 adQs (numbers): singular, dual, plural

+ 10 forms in impersonal voice

= 190 forms of hl�c for a [\l M (280 forms for type U [\l M, by adding 90 =[10 �i\js X 1

|ePL, active voice, X 3 q MNks X 3 adQs])

See the chart on the next page for the breakdown and explanation.

Since there are so many forms of hlmc for each [\l M, one must be clear about the

objectives of learning hlmc.

The objectives are to be able to:

1) Locate the hlmc� qbR ` (verb) in a sentence.

2) Identify the [\l M of the hlmc, and look it up in a dictionary.

3) Identify �i\j, if possible.

4) Identify |ePL. This is very important.

5) Identify q MNk and adQ.

After identifying these, the hlmc will be marked in the format of:

hlmcR ` = [\l M� + hlm (�i\j�/|ePL�/q MNk�/adQR)

E.g., âhl = ^½ (1P) to be + ��/Active voice (il fhj)/3rd person/Singular

To achieve these objectives, the student can firstly focus only on forms of the verb in:

� �� (present tense)/Active voice (il fhj)/3rd person/Singular

� �� (present tense)/Passive voice (iR fh�)/3rd person/Singular


29

7. Summary – the formation of hlmcR `

Every single form of hlmc falls into one of the squares in this chart.

|ePL� (voice) il fhj iR fh� ^\aZ

qj� �qb (P) ��Q Zqb (A) |�e� P A A A

1. �� (Present Tense) 9 9 9 1

2. h�� (Perfect Past Tense) 9 9 9 1

3. �� (First Future Tense) 9 9 9 1

4. �s� (Second Future Tense) 9 9 9 1

5. �P� (Imperative Mood) 9 9 9 1

6. �m (Simple Past Tense) 9 9 9 1

7. hah[h�m (Potential Mood) 9 9 9 1

8. �w�h�fm (Benedictive Mood) 9 9 9 1

9. �m (General Past Tense) 9 9 9 1

10. �sm (Conditional Mood) 9 9 9 1

9 = 9 forms (3 persons x 3 numbers); 1 = only one form (3rd person singular) in impersonal voice.

In all ten �i\js:

• qj��qb|�es (P) are used for qj��qb� [\l Ms in il fhj |ePL.

• ��ZQ Zqb|�es (A) are used for ��ZQ Zqb� [\l Ms in il fhj |ePL.

• ��ZQ Zqb|�es (A) are used for all [\l Ms in iR fh� and ^\aZ |ePL.

• The forms in iR fh� and ^\aZ are identical.

In four �i\js in the shaded area, namely ��, �P�, �m, and hah[h�m:

• There are ten different manners of forming g� according to ten groups of the [\l M in

il fhj |ePL.

• There is addition of e for all [\l Ms in iR fh� and ^\aZ |ePL.

In the other six �i\js:

• The ten groups of conjugations do not matter in the process of forming g�.

• There is no addition of e in iR fh� and ^\aZ |ePL.


30

8. Steps in formation of hlmcR `

To form a hlmc, there should first be a haa¦\ [vivak:ā], intention, or desire to convey

something on the part of the speaker. According to the haa¦\, the elements of verb, namely

[\l M, �i\j, |ePL, q MNk, and adQ, are decided.

For example, if the speaker wants to convey “they are” in Sanskrit, elements of the

verb will be:

• [\l M� : ^½ (1P) to be

• �i\j� : �� (Present tense) The action is happening at present.

• |ePL� : il fhj |ePL� (Active voice) The agent of the action is denoted by the verb.

• q MNk� : |�Rq MNk� (3rd person) The agent is neither the speaker nor listener.

• adQR ` : oèadQR ` (Plural) The number of the agent is three or more.

Step 1) hlm-|�e is suffixed to a [\l M according to the details of haa¦\.

^½ (1P) to be + hÉ (��/il fhj/3rd person/Plural)

Since the voice is active voice and the [\l M is type “P”, the 3rd person plural hlm|�e

of qj��qb|�es, which is “hÉ” is used.

Step 2) hlm-|�e is modified according to �i\j.

^½ + ghc

Step 3) g� is modified according to L� (group) and �i\j.

^½ + g + ghc g, an additional |�e for 1st L� is suffixed.

^P + g + ghc L M� takes place.

â ` + g + ghc Sandhi (phonetic change) takes place.

Step 4) g� and hlm-|�e are combined with sandhi rules, if applicable.

âhc

Assignment on the concept of verbs:

� Add these words to your vocabulary: [\l M�, L��, �i\j�, |ePL�, il fhj |ePL�, iR fh� |ePL�,

q MNk�, |�R-q MNk�, R®R-q MNk�, �tR-q MNk�, adQR `, vi-adQR `, h�-adQR `, oè-adQR `

Topic V – Conjugation in �� (Present tense)

31

Topic V

Conjugation in �� (present tense)

At the beginning stage of studying verbs, it is essential to cover the conjugation in

�� (present tense) in il fhj (active voice) and iR fh� (passive voice) with both qj��qhb-[\l Ms

and ��QZqhb-[\l Ms. In this book, the ready-made forms of g� are provided because the

forming of g� at the very beginning of Sanskrit study is not an efficient use of time. Actual

formation of not only verbs but also any word forms can be studied well through Pā=ini-

sūtras. Until then, the objectives of the study of verb should be clearly limited to these

points:

• Being able to identify hlmc (verb) in a sentence

• Understanding of the structures of hlmc (verb)

• Being able to identify [\l M and consult the dictionary

• Being able to identify |ePL (voice)

To achieve these goals, covering �� in this section is enough because the same

knowledge can be applied to other �i\js.

After this section, it is recommended to defer studying the other �i\js and start

studying nouns.

In this book, the abbreviations used for 3rd, 2nd, and 1st person are “III”, “II”, and “I”,

respectively.


32

1. �� (Present Tense) in il fhj |ePL� (Active Voice) with qj��qb� [\l M�

(Parasmaipadī dhātu7)

Type P [\l Ms (qj��qhb[\l Ms) in the 1st L� (group)

When conjugating [\l Ms in the 1st L� in �� and il fhj, the g� takes L M�7, if applicable.

Because an additional suffix “g” is suffixed to [\l Ms in the 1st L�, all the g�s end with “g”.

The ready-made final forms of the g�s are shown in the last column of the table below.

Original [\l M as listed in [\l Mq\Ë�

[\l M in dictionary form

Meaning in English g�R ` (stem) after modification

is ék ¢ ha�ZÆQ Z is k ` (1P) to draw, to plough ik f

Lês¢ LlÂ LR ` (1P) to go LÛ

dj¢ L�� f� dj (1P) to move, to walk dj

}�a¢ |\�[\j�Z }�a ` (1P) to live }�a

áhw¢ | Z¦�Z áw ` (1P) to see qæe

�éR¢ |ëìZ w{Z d QR ` (1P) to salute QR

��Ê ` |\q�Z Q� (1U) to lead, to carry Qe

qË¢ ¨p\e\� a\hd qË (1P) to study qË

ql í¢ LlÂ ql ` (1P) to fall ql

o M[¢ gaLRQ Z o M[ ` (1P) to know oP[

^½ nt\e\R ` ^½ (1P) to be â

aén¢ hQa\n Z an ` (1P) to dwell an

�\ LhlhQastÂ î\ (1P) to stay hl�

�sé hdc\e\R ` �s (1P) to remember �j

7 L M� is a name for letters g, v and Ó. A change of a vowel into L M� takes place according to

similarity in î\Q. E.g., �/� becomes v, �/Ñ becomes Ó, �/Î becomes gj, etc. See page 30 and 35.


33

qj��qb of hlm-|�es modified for �� (present tense)

In ��-�i\j, the original hlm-|�es are modified as seen in the following chart.

adQR ` q MNk�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�Rq MNk� (3rd person)

hl III/1 l� III/2 ghc III/3 R®Rq MNk� (2nd person)

hn II/1 �� II/2 � II/3 �tRq MNk� (1st person)

hR I/1 a� I/2 R� I/3

Conjugation table for ^½-[\l M • [\l M� (root) : ^½ nt\e\R ` (1P) to be • �i\j� (tense/mood) : �� (present tense) • |ePL� (voice) : il fhj-|ePL� (active voice) • g�R ` (stem) : â

adQR ` q MNk�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�Rq MNk�

(3rd person) âhl III/1

He is

âl� III/2

Those two are

âhc III/3 * They are

R®Rq MNk�

(2nd person) âhn II/1

You are

â�� II/2

You two are

â� II/3

You all are

�tRq MNk�

(1st person) â\hR I/1 **

I am

â\a� I/2 **

We two are

â\R� I/3 **

We are

* Within a word, when a short g is followed by a L M� letter (g, v, or Ó), the latter one (the

L M� letter) is the substitute for both. In other words, short g + L M� = L M�.

** The last g of the g� is elongated (b�Ç f�) when followed by a ` or R `.

Assignment on Conjugation of qj��qhb[\l M in 1st L� in ��/il fhj

By observing rules described under the table, make conjugation table for each [\l M

on the previous page. If needed, use the Workbook.


34

Assignment on Conjugation of qj��qhb[\l M in ��/il fhj

� For these [\l Ms in 4th and 6th L�, make conjugation tables.

� Do Exercise #1 in the last part of this book.

Type P [\l Ms (qj��qhb[\l Ms) in the 4th L� (group)

g� does not take L M�. An additional suffix “e” is suffixed for [\l Ms in the 4th L�.



Meaning in English

g�R ` (stem) after modification

gn M¢ ¦ Zq� Z gn ` (4P) to throw gñ

�w¢ gbwfQ Z Qw ` (4P) to perish Qæe

l Mék ¢ |�lÂ l Mk ` (4P) to be pleased l M_

Qslò L\¾ha¦ Zq Z Qsl ` (4P) to dance Qs�

q Mék ¢ q MóÂ q Mk ` (4P) to nourish q M_

R Mz¢ a �hd�Z R Mz (4P) to be confused R Mô

w Mé k ¢ wPk�Z w Mk ` (4P) to dry w M_

Type P [\l Ms (qj��qhb[\l Ms) in the 6th L� (group)

g� does not take L M�. An additional suffix “g” is suffixed for [\l Ms in the 6th L�.



Meaning in English


�k M¢ �Û\e\R ` �k ` (6P) to wish �Û

hbéw¢ õ ghln} fQ Z hbw ` (6U) to show hbw

|éÛ¢ ��ö\e\R ` |Û (6P) to ask qsÛ

R Méd í¢ õ RP¦�Z R Md ` (6U) to set free R Mr

habí¢ õ �\^ Z hab (6U) to find haÃ

÷sw¢ n�÷wfQ Z ÷sw ` (6P) to touch ÷sw

h�Æ¢ g¦jhaø\n Z h�Æ ` (6P) to write h�Æ

haéw¢ |aZwQ Z haw ` (6P) to enter haw

nsé}¢ hanLù ns} ` (6P) to create ns}


35

2. Consulting [\l MiPw� [dhātukośa7]

[\l Ms are defined by Pā=ini in his original book called [\l Mq\Ë� [dhātupā;ha7]. [\l MiPw�

[dhātukośa7] is a book in which these [\l Ms are arranged in Sanskrit alphabetical order.

One of the objectives of studying hlmc is to be able to identify the [\l M of a hlmc by

tracking back to the original form of the [\l M. Only then [\l MiPw� can be utilized.

The manners of modification of simple vowels (�/�/�)

While tracking back to the original form of the [\l M from the modified form in hlmc,

the understanding of the types of modification of simple vowels helps.

Manners of modification of simple vowels

Modification Original � � �

b�Ç f� [dīrgha7] (Long vowel) � Ñ Î

L M�� [gu=a7] (g, v, Ó) v Ó g + j

ashu� [v6ddhi7] (�, Ò, Ô) Ò Ô � + j

e� ` [ya=] (e `, a `, j, �) e ` a ` j

gea\e\a�(ge `, ga `, �e `, �a) ge/�e ` ga/�a ` -

For example, by looking at }ehn, the first guess of the [\l M would be “}e”, which is

not found in [\l MiPw�. In that case, one can try to find “} Z (je)”, “h} (ji)”, or “}� (jī)” because

the “ay” of “}e ` (jay)” is most probably a modification of “e”, “i” or “ī”. “ay” is the result

of gea\e\a-nh� from “e”. And “e” is a L M� form of “i” or “ī”.

In the same logic, ^½ [\l M is tracked back from âhl.

Similarly, from ljhl, when “lj” is not found as a [\l M, one can infer that the [\l M

would be “ls (t6)” or “lú (tû)” because “ar” of “lj” could be a L M� modification of “�” or “Î”.

Exactly the same thing can be said to “zjhl” to find “ü (h6)” [\l M.

In the case of wPdhl, when “wPd” is not found as [\l M, “w Md ` (śuc)” can be guessed

because a penultimate �/�/� of a [\l M can take L M� in the 1st conjugation.

Assignment on [\l MiPw�



36

3. �qnL\ f� [upasargā7] (Verbal prefixes)

There is a group of twenty-two particles called “|\hb-L� [prādi-ga=a]”, a group (L�)

whose first member (�hb) is | [pra], as follows:

1. | [pra] 2. qj\ [parā] 3. gq [apa] 4. nR ` [sam] 5. gQ M [anu]

6. ga [ava] 7. hQn ` [nis] 8. hQj [nir] 9. ýn ` [dus] 10. ýj [dur]

11. ha [vi] 12. �m [ā�] 8 13. hQ [ni] 14. gh[ [adhi] 15. ghq [api]

16. ghl [ati] 17. n M [su] 18. �b [ud] 19. gh^ [abhi] 20. |hl [prati]

21. qhj [pari] 22. �q [upa]

When a particle in the |\hb-L� is used together with a [\l M, it is called an �qnL f

[upasarga]. An �qnL f may change the meaning, may not change the meaning, or may

enhance the meaning of a [\l M to which it is added.

E.g., 1: ^½ (1P) to be

gQ M + ^½ = to experience; gh^ + ^½ = to overwhelm; | + ^½ = to appear; nR ` + ^½ = to be possible

E.g., 2: ü (1U) to take away

� + ü = to eat; �b + � + ü = to illustrate; qhj + ü = to avoid; | + ü = to attack; ha + ü = to

sport; ha + ga + ü = to deal with; nR ` + ü = to withdraw; �q + nR ` + ü = to summarize

Assignment on �qnL\ f�

� Try to memorize the 22 members of the |\hb-L�.


8 The final m of �m is an indicatory letter and is removed. Thus only “�” is seen in use.


37

4. �� (Present Tense) in il fhj |ePL� (Active Voice) with ��QZqb� [\l M� (Ātmanepadī root)

Type A [\l Ms (��Q Zqhb[\l Ms) in the 1st L� (group)

The formation of g� is the same as for type P. The g� takes L M�, if applicable.

Because an additional suffix “g” is suffixed to [\l Ms in the 1st L�, all the g�s end with “g”.



Meaning in English


�¦¢é bw fQ Z �¦ ` (1A) to see �¦

i\þ¢ b��Â i\w ` (1A) to shine i\w

o\[s¢é �\ÌQ Z o\[ ` (1A) to negate o\[

^\k¢é ¨p\e\� a\hd ^\k ` (1A) to speak ^\k

R Mb¢é zkù R Mb (1A) to rejoice RPb

elòé |e� Z el ` (1A) to strive el

jR M¢é ��Ì\e\R ` jR ` (1A) to play, to rejoice jR

ÌM�^¢ék ` �\^ Z �^ ` (1A) to obtain �^

asl M¢é al fQ Z asl ` (1A) to be al f

whi¢ w�\e\R ` wmi (1A) to doubt wmi

w M ¢ b��Â w M ` (1A) to shine wP^

kz¢é Rk f� Z nz (1A) to suffer nz

k Zas¢ n ZaQ Z n Za ` (1A) to serve n Za


38

��QZqb of hlm-|�es modified for �� (present tense)

In ��-�i\j, the original hlm-|�es are modified as seen in the following chart.

Conjugation table for �^-[\l M • [\l M� (root) : �^ ` (1A) to gain • �i\j� (tense/mood) : �� (present tense) • |ePL� (voice) : il fhj-|ePL� (active voice) • g�R ` (stem) : �^

* and ** - The manners of modifications are the same as qj��qb� [\l Ms.

*** - The last g of the g�, and the beginning � of the |�e, are substituted by v (a L M� letter

of the two). (Ref. L M�-Sandhi in Volume 2.)

adQR ` q MNk�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)


lZ III/1 �l Z III/2 gcZ III/3

R®Rq MNk� (2nd person)

n Z II/1 �� Z II/2 ßZ II/3

�tRq MNk� (1st person)

v I/1 azZ I/2 RzZ I/3

adQR ` q MNk�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�Rq MNk�

(3rd person) �^lZ III/1

He gains �^ Zl Z III/2 *** Those two gain

�^cZ III/3 *

They gain

R®Rq MNk�

(2nd person) �^nZ II/1

You gain �^ Z� Z II/2 ***

You two gain �^ßZ II/3

You all gain

�tRq MNk�

(1st person) �^Z I/1 *

I gain �^\azZ I/2 **

We two gain �^\RzZ I/3 **

We gain


39

Type A [\l Ms (��Q Zqhb[\l Ms) in the 4th L� (group)

The formation of g� is the same as for type P. g� does not take L M�. An additional

suffix “e” is suffixed for [\l Ms in the 4th L�.

Assignment on Conjugation of ��Q Zqhb[\l M in ��/il fhj

� For each ��Q Zqhb-[\l M in 4th L�, make conjugation tables.

� Do Exercises #4 and #5 in the last part of this book.



Meaning in English


}Qòé |\ý^\ fa Z }Q ` (4A) to be born }\e

b�qòé b��Â b�q ` (4A) to shine b��

qéb¢é LlÂ qb (4A) to gain qx

o Mé[ ¢é gaLRQ Z o M[ ` (4A) to know o M®

RéQ ¢é �\Q Z RQ ` (4A) to consider Rø

e Mé[ ¢é n �|z\jZ e M[ ` (4A) to fight e M®

haéb¢é nt\e\R ` hab (4A) to be hax

nsé}¢é hanLù ns} ` (4A) to create ns¥


40

5. �� (Present Tense) in il fhj |ePL� (Active Voice) with common [\l Ms

The following [\l Ms are frequently seen in scriptures, but their conjugation is not

analyzed in this book due to the complication in the process of conjugation. It is

recommended to become familiar with these forms, especially the forms in 3rd person

singular.

gn¢ ^ Mha – gn ` to be (2P) in �� (Present Tense) – il fhj-|ePL� (Active Voice)

adQR ` q MNk�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�Rq MNk�

(3rd person)

gh³ III/1

He is ³� III/2

Those two are nhc III/3

They are

R®Rq MNk�

(2nd person)

ghn II/1

You are î� II/2

You two are î II/3

You all are

�tRq MNk�

(1st person)

gh� I/1

I am ²� I/2

We two are �� I/3

We are

ÌMis Ê ` ij�Z – is to do (8U) in �� (Present Tense) – il fhj-|ePL� (Active Voice)

Since is is type U, �êqb� [\l M�, two sets of forms are seen; one with qj��qb suffixes

and the other with ��Q Zqb suffixes.

qj� �qb\hQ ��Q Zqb\hQ

viadQR ` h�adQR ` oèadQR ` viadQR ` h�adQR ` oèadQR `


ijPhl III/1

He does iMNl� III/2

Those two do iMa fhc III/3

They do iMNl Z III/1

He does iMa\ fl Z III/2

Those two do iMa fl Z III/3

They do


ijPhk II/1

You do iMN�� II/2

You two do iMN� II/3

You all do iMNk Z II/1

You do iMa\ f� Z II/2

You two do iMNßZ II/3

You all do


ijPhR I/1

I do iMa f� I/2

We two do iMR f� I/3

We do iMaù I/1

I do iMa fzZ I/2

We two do iMR fzZ I/3

We do


41

�\ gaoP[Q Z – �\ to know (9P) in �� (Present Tense) – il fhj-|ePL� (Active Voice)

adQR ` q MNk�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�Rq MNk�

(3rd person)

}\Q\hl III/1

He knows }\Q�l� III/2

Those two know }\Qhc III/3

They know

R®Rq MNk�

(2nd person)

}\Q\hn II/1

You know }\Q�� II/2

You two know }\Q�� II/3

You all know

�tRq MNk�

(1st person)

}\Q\hR I/1

I know }\Q�a� I/2

We two know }\Q�R� I/3

We know

�q í¢ ¨\�Â – �q ` to pervade (5P) in �� (Present Tense) – il fhj-|ePL� (Active Voice)

adQR ` q MNk�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�Rq MNk�

(3rd person)

��Phl III/1

He gains �� Ml� III/2

Those two gain �� Mahc III/3

They gain

R®Rq MNk�

(2nd person)

��Phk II/1

You gain �� M�� II/2

You two gain �� M� II/3

You all gain

�tRq MNk�

(1st person)

��PhR I/1

I gain �� Ma� I/2

We two gain �� MR� I/3

We gain

hab¢ �\Q Z – hab to know (2P) in �� (Present Tense) – il fhj-|ePL� (Active Voice)

There are two forms for each person and number.

adQR ` q MNk�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�Rq MNk�

(3rd person)

aZb/aZht III/1

He knows a Zbl M�/hat� III/2

Those two know haý�/habhc III/3

They know

R®Rq MNk�

(2nd person)

aZ�/aZh� II/1

You know a Zb� M�/ha�� II/2

You two know hab/ha� II/3

You all know

�tRq MNk�

(1st person)

aZb/aZh� I/1

I know ha�/ha�� I/2

We two know ha�/ha�� I/3

We know


42

£½Ê ` ¨p\e\� a\hd – £½ to say (2U) in �� (Present Tense) – il fhj-|ePL� (Active Voice)

When the first five qj��qb suffixes follow, there are two forms.




£a�hl/ �z III/1

He says

£½l�/ �zl M� III/2

Those two say

£ Mahc/ �z� III/3

They say

£½l Z III/1

He says £½a\l Z III/2

Those two say

£ Mal Z III/3

They say


£a�hk/ �� II/1

You say

£½��/ �z� M� II/2

You two say

£½� II/3

You all say

£½k Z II/1

You say £ Ma\� Z II/2

You two say £½ßZ II/3

You all say


£a�hR I/1

I say £½a� I/2

We two say £½R� I/3

We say £ Ma Z I/1

I say £½azZ I/2

We two say £½RzZ I/3

We say

ÌMb\Ê ` b\Q Z – b\ to give (3U) in �� (Present Tense) – il fhj-|ePL� (Active Voice)




bb\hl III/1

He gives bt� III/2

Those two give

bbhl III/3

They give btZ III/1

He gives bb\l Z III/2

Those two give

bbl Z III/3

They give


bb\hn II/1

You give b�� II/2

You two give

b� II/3

You all give b� Z II/1

You give bb\� Z II/2

You two give b ßZ II/3

You all give


bb\hR I/1

I give b�� I/2

We two give

b�� I/3

We give bbZ I/1

I give b�zZ I/2

We two give b�zZ I/3

We give

Assignment on Conjugation of common [\l Ms in ��/il fhj

� Try to find the forms in this section of hlmc in Bhagavadgītā.


43

6. �� (Present Tense) – iR fh� |ePL� (Passive Voice)

iRfh� |ePL� (Passive Voice) is used to denote the iR f (object) of action.

E.g., L}� áæelZ S (The elephant is seen.)

Because iR f (object) is required in the construction, the [\l M has to be a niR fi-[\l M�

[sakarmaka-dhātu7], that which indicates an action which takes an object. In some

dictionaries, niR fi-[\l M� is indicated as “v.t.”, transitive verb.

Formation of g� in iR fh� |ePL�

“e” is added to the [\l M, and there is no L M� modification on the [\l M. The formation is

the same as the formation used for the [\l Ms in 4th L�.

hlm-|�e in iR fh� |ePL�

��Q Zqb suffixes are used, regardless of the type of the [\l M (P, A, and U). Original

hlm-|�es are modified according to the �i\j.

Combining the g� and hlm-|�e

The modifications are the same as those seen in ��Q Zqb� [\l Ms.

• [\l M� (root) : áw ` (1P) to see • �i\j� (tense/mood) : �� (present tense) • |ePL� (voice) : iR fh� |ePL� (passive voice) • g�R ` (stem) : áæe

adQR ` q MNk�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�Rq MNk�

(3rd person) áæelZ III/1

He is seen

áæeZl Z III/2

Those two are seen

áæecZ III/3

They are seen

R®Rq MNk�

(2nd person) áæen Z II/1

You are seen

áæeZ� Z II/2

You two are seen

áæeßZ II/3

You all are seen

�tRq MNk�

(1st person) áæeZ I/1

I am seen

áæe\azZ I/2

We two are seen

áæe\RzZ I/3

We are seen


44

Assignment on Conjugation of common [\l Ms in ��/iR fh�

� Make conjugation table for each one of the [\l Ms listed below.


Lês¢ LlÂ LR ` (1P) to reach L¸lZ (It is reached), L¸Zl Z, L¸cZ ...

qË¢ ¨p\e\� a\hd qË (1P) to study qlZ (It is studied), q Zl Z, qcZ ...

gn M¢ ¦ Zq� Z gn ` (4P) to throw gñlZ (It is thrown), gñZl Z, gñcZ...

�k M¢ �Û\e\R ` �k ` (6P) to wish �_lZ (It is wished), �_Zl Z, �_cZ ...

R Méd í¢ õ RP¦�Z R Md ` (6U) to set free R M�lZ (It is freed), R M� Zl Z, R M�cZ ...

h�Æ¢ g¦jhaø\n Z h�Æ ` (6P) to write h��lZ (It is written), h�� Zl Z, h��cZ ...

�\ gaoP[Q Z �\ (9P) to know �\el Z (It is known), �\e Zl Z, �\ecZ ...

w ¢ wpÂ wi (5P) to be able w»lZ (It is possible to be done), w»Zl Z, w»cZ ...

�¦¢é bw fQ Z �¦ ` (1A) to see ��lZ (It is seen), �� Zl Z, ��cZ ...

o\[s¢é �\ÌQ Z o\[ ` (1A) to negate o\®lZ (It is negated), o\®Zl Z, o\®cZ ...

7. ^\aZ |ePL� (Impersonal Voice)

^\aZ |ePL� (Impersonal Voice) is used to denote the action of the [\l M itself.

The [\l M in ^\a Z |ePL� should be an giRfi-[\l M� [akarmaka-dhātu7], that which

indicates an action which does not take an object. E.g., to be, to become, to stand, to sit, to

sleep, etc. In some dictionaries, giRfi-[\l M� is indicated as “v.i.”, intransitive verb.

E.g., ��lZ III/1 gh�Q\ 3/1 S (Burning is done by fire.)9

E.g., hQ}Lsz\l ` 5/1 l½� fR ` 0 hahQL f l\R ` III/1 S (Leaving from own house quickly has to be done.)

Also, when iR f (object) is not intended to be told, niR fi-[\l M� can be used in ^\aZ |ePL�

The steps of formation of hlmc are the same as the steps used in iR fh� |ePL.

Action itself is denoted in ^\aZ |ePL. Since action is neither the speaker nor the

listener, and does not have any number, only 3rd person singular forms are seen in ^\aZ |ePL.

E.g., áæel Z III/1 b ZabtZQ 3/1 S (Seeing is done by Devadatta.)

9 As ^\a, the action itself, is denoted by hlm-|�e, the undenoted il\ f should be told in the 3rd case.

(Pā=ini-sūtra 2.3.18)

Topic VI – Conjugation in other �i\js

45

Topic VI

Conjugation in other �i\js

Since the main objectives so far have been covered by studying ��-�i\j, beginner

students should defer studying this section and move onto the next section, n Mocs and

ha^hp-g� f. They should come back to this section after completing the section on declension

of vowel-ending |\hlqhbis. It is recommended to study the Vowel Sandhi (gd-nh��) section

of Volume 2 of this series before studying this section.

The basic concept of forming hlmc is the same throughout all the �i\js:

1) Modification of hlm-|�e

o hlm-|�es are modified according to �i\j.

o There is similarity in modification among the �i\js which have � at the end. i.e.

��, h��, ��, �s�, and �P�. They are also known as h�l-�i\js.

o There is similarity in modification among the �i\js which have m at the end. i.e.

�m, hah[h�m, �w�h�fm, �m, and �sm. They are also known as hml-�i\js.

o Note that the last n ` becomes “:”, hanL f.

2) Modification of g�

o For ��, �P�, �m, and hah[h�m, the modified forms of g� are common.

� In active voice, the modification is done according to ten L�s of the [\l M.

� In passive voice, regardless of the L�, “e” is added to the g� without causing

L M�.

o For other �i\js (h��, ��, �s�, �w�h�fm, �m, and �sm), the classification of ten L�s

does not make any difference.

� In passive voice, “e” is not added to the g�.

3) Combination of g� and hlm-|�e

o The rules observed in combining g� and hlm-|�e are applied for all �i\js.


46

1. h�� (Perfect Past Tense)

h�� (Perfect Past Tense) is used to express an action in the past which the speaker

did not see directly (qjP¦ Z).

Modification of hlm-|�es in h��

hlm-|�es modified for h��



3rd person g gl M� �� v �lZ �jZ

2nd person � g� M� g n Z ��Z ßZ

1st person g a R v azZ RzZ

� In qj��qb, the |�es are changed completely. Only some are modified in ��Q Zqb.

� If the [\l M ends with �, III/1 and I/1 of qj��qb are changed to Ô. Thus ashu-nh�� takes

place between � and Ô, resulting in Ô together. E.g., qqÂ.

Modification of g� in h��

� h�ìR ` (Duplication) of the [\l M takes place when applicable.

When h�ì takes place, an extra syllable similar to the [\l M is observed before the [\l M.

^½ to be (1P) and gn ` to be (2P) in h�� (Perfect Past Tense) – il fhj |ePL� (Active Voice)

* gn ` declines in the same manner as ^½ in h��.

adQR ` q MNk�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�Rq MNk�

(3rd person) o^½a III/1

He was

o^½al M� III/2

Those two were

o^½a M� III/3

They were

R®Rq MNk�

(2nd person) o^½ha� II/1

You were

o^½a� M� II/2

You two were

o^½a II/3

You all were

�tRq MNk�

(1st person) o^½a I/1

I was

o^½haa I/2

We two were

o^½haR I/3

We were


47

LR í¢ LlÂ LR ` (1P) to go }L\R (he went), }�Rl M�, }�R M� ...

aéd¢ qhj^\k�Z ad ` (2P) to speak �a\d (he spoke), Ñd Ml M�, Ñd M� ...

|éÛ¢ ��ö\e\R ` |Û (6P) to ask q|Û (he asked), q|�l M�, q|�� ...

e\é |\q�Z e\ (2P) to go eeÂ (he went), eel M�, ee M� ...

b\� ` b\Q Z b\ (1P) to give bbÂ (he gave), bbl M�, bý� ...

ÌM[\éÊ ` [\j�qPk�eP� [\ (3U) to put, to grant b[Â (he granted), b[l M�, b[ M� ...

�\é w{\h�n¢�PLeP� �\ (1P) to blow b�Â (he blew), b�l M�, b� M� ...

w M ¢ b��Â w M ` (1A) to shine w Mw M Z (he shone), w Mw M \l Z, w Mw Mh^jZ,

w Mw Mh^k Z, w Mw M \� Z, w Mw Mh^ßZ, w Mw M Z, w Mw MhâzZ, w Mw MhaRzZ ÌM�^¢ék ` �\^ Z �^ ` (1A) to obtain �Z^ Z (he gained), �Z^\l Z, �Zh^jZ …

Assignment on Conjugation in h��

� Observe the forms in 3rd person singular.

� Do the h�� portion of Exercise #7 in the last part of this book.


48

2. �� (First Future Tense)

�� (First Future Tense) is used to express an action in the remote future, i.e., not of

today. hlmcs in �� are rarely seen.

Modification of hlm-|�es in ��

hlm-|�es modified for ��



3rd person l\ l\jÂ l\j� l\ l\jÂ l\j�

2nd person l\hn l\î� l\î l\n Z l\n\� Z l\ßZ

1st person l\h� l\²� l\�� l\zZ l\²zZ l\�lZ

� “l\n”, an additional suffix to the [\l M, is attached to hlm-|�es in this chart.

� hlm-|�es modified for �� are used as a basis.

� The forms in |�Rq MNk are further modified, and they are the same for both qbs.

Modification of g� in ��

� If the [\l M is marked “S” in [\l MiPw�, � is added before the additional suffix l\n `.

� L M� takes place if applicable.

^½ to be (1P) and gn ` to be (2P) in �� (First Future Tense) – il fhj |ePL� (Active Voice)

* gn ` declines in the same manner as ^½ in ��.

adQR ` q MNk�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�Rq MNk�

(3rd person) ^hal\ III/1

He will be

^hal\jÂ III/2

Those two will be

^hal\j� III/3

They will be

R®Rq MNk�

(2nd person) ^hal\hn II/1

You will be

^hal\î� II/2

You two will be

^hal\î II/3

You all will be

�tRq MNk�

(1st person) ^hal\h� I/1

I will be

^hal\²� I/2

We two will be

^hal\�� I/3

We will be


49

qË¢ ¨p\e\� a\hd qË (1PS) to study qhËl\ (he will study), qhËl\jÂ, qhËl\j�, qhËl\hn, ...

R Mb¢é zkù R Mb (1AS) to rejoice RPhbl\ (he will rejoice), RPhbl\jÂ, RPhbl\j�,

RPhbl\n Z, RPhbl\n\�\R `, RPhbl\ßZ, RPhbl\zZ, RPhbl\²zZ, RPhbl\�zZ

}Qòé |\ý^\ fa Z }Q ` (4AS) to be born }hQl\ (he will be born), }hQl\jÂ, }hQl\j�,

}hQl\n Z, }hQl\n\�\R `, }hQl\ßZ …

Assignment on Conjugation in ��

� Observe the elements in the forms. E.g., â ` + � + l\n ` + hR, qË + � + l\n ` + hR, etc.

� Do the �� portion of Exercise #7 in the last part of this book.


50

3. �s� (Second Future Tense)

�s� (Second Future Tense) is used to express an action in the future in general.

Modification of hlm-|�es in �s�

hlm-|�es modified for �s�



3rd person ñhl ñl� ñhc ñlZ ñZl Z ñcZ

2nd person ñhn ñ�� ñ� ñnZ ñZ� Z ñßZ

1st person ñ\hR ñ\a� ñ\R� ñZ ñ\azZ ñ\RzZ

� “ñ”, an additional suffix to the [\l M is attached to hlm-|�es in this chart.

� hlm-|�es modified for �� are used as a basis.

Modification of g� in �s�

� If the [\l M is marked “S” in [\l MiPw�, � is added before the additional suffix ñ. In this

case, ñ becomes _, together resulting in �_.


^½ to be (1P) and gn ` to be (2P) in �s� (Second Future Tense) – il fhj |ePL� (Active Voice)

* gn ` declines in the same manner as ^½ in �s�.

adQR ` q MNk�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�Rq MNk�

(3rd person) ^ha_hl III/1

He will be ^ha_l� III/2

Those two will be ^ha_hc III/3

They will be R®Rq MNk�

(2nd person) ^ha_hn II/1

You will be ^ha_�� II/2

You two will be ^ha_� II/3

You all will be �tRq MNk�

(1st person) ^ha_\hR I/1

I will be ^ha_\a� I/2

We two will be ^ha_\R� I/3

We will be


51

Lês¢ LlÂ LR ` (1P) to go LhR_hl (he will go), LhR_l�, LhR_hc ...

ab¢ ¨p\e\� a\hd ab (1P) to say, to tell ahb_hl (he will say), ahb_l�, ahb_hc ...

b\� ` b\Q Z b\ (1P) to give b\ñhl (he will give), b\ñl�, b\ñhc ...

ÌMis éÊ ` ij�Z is (8U) to do ihj_hl (he will do), ihj_l�, ihj_hc ...

/ihj_lZ, ihj_Zl Z, ihj_cZ, ihj_n Z, ihj_Z� Z, ihj_ßZ, ihj_Z, ihj_\azZ, ihj_\RzZ

R Mb¢é zkù R Mb (1A) to rejoice RPhb_lZ (he will rejoice), RPhb_Zl Z, RPhb_cZ …

ÌM�^¢ék ` �\^ Z �^ ` (1A) to obtain ��lZ (he will obtain), �� Zl Z, ��cZ …

}Qòé |\ý^\ fa Z }Q ` (4A) to be born }hQ_lZ (he will be born), }hQ_Zl Z, }hQ_cZ …

Assignment on Conjugation in �s�

� Observe the elements in the forms and try to conjugate the above [\l Ms for yourself.

E.g., â ` + �_ + hl (For combining g� and hlm-|�e, the same rules are for �� are

applied.)

� Do the �s� portion of Exercise #7 in the last part of this book.


52

4. �P� (Imperative Mood)

�P� (Imperative Mood) is used to express a command, wish, etc.

Modification of hlm-|�es in �P�

hlm-|�es modified for �P�



3rd person l M l\R ` gc M l\R ` �l\R/�l\R ` gc\R/gl\R `

2nd person -/hz lR ` l ² ��\R/��\R ` ßR `

1st person �hQ �a �R Ò �az� �Rz�

In qj��qb,

� � of III/1 and III/3 becomes �.

� There will be no suffix for II/1 if the g� ends with g. Otherwise, hz is the suffix.

� Others are like �m.

� For �tRq MNk, � is added before suffix.

In ��Q Zqb,

� The modified forms for �� are used as the basis for further modifications.

� v at the end becomes �R `.

� In �tRq MNk, v at the end becomes Ò.

� For II/1 and II/3, the suffixes are ² and ßR `, respectively.

Modification of g� in �P�

� The formation of g� is the same as for �� (present tense) in both il fhj and iR fh�

|ePLs.


53

^½ nt\e\R ` – ^½ to be (1P) in �P� (Imperative Mood) – il fhj |ePL� (Active Voice)

adQR ` q MNk�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�Rq MNk�

(3rd person) âl M III/1

May he be âl\R ` III/2

May those two be âc M III/3

May they be R®Rq MNk�

(2nd person) â II/1

May you be âlR ` II/2

May you two be âl II/3

May you all be �tRq MNk�

(1st person) â\hQ I/1

May I be â\a I/2

May we two be â\R I/3

May we be

gn M¢ ^ Mha gn ` (2P) to be g³M, ³\R `, nc M, vh[, ³R `, ³, gn\hQ, gn\a, gn\R

Lês¢ LlÂ LR ` (1P) to go LÛlM (May he go), LÛl\R `, LÛcM...

ab¢ ¨p\e\� a\hd ab (1P) to say, to tell abl M, abl\R `, abc M ...

qË¢ ¨p\e\� a\hd qË (1P) to study qËl M, qËl\R `, qËc M ...

áhw¢ | Z¦�Z áw ` (1P) to see qæel M, qæel\R `, qæecM ...

�\é LhlhQastÂ î\ (1P) to stay hl�l M, hl�l\R `, hl�c M...

�sé hdc\e\R ` �s (1P) to remember �jl M, �jl\R `, �jcM ...

�w¢ gbwfQ Z Qw ` (4P) to perish Qæel M, Qæel\R `, QæecM ...

nsé}¢ hanLù ns} ` (6P) to create ns}l M, ns}l\R `, ns}c M ...

ÌMis Ê ` ij�Z is (8U) to do ijPl M, iMNl\R `, iMa fc M, iMN, iMNlR `, iMNl, ija\h�, ija\a, ija\R

/iMNl\R `, iMa\ fl\R `, iMa fl\R `, iMN�, iMa\ f�\R ` iMNßR `, ija �, ija\az�, ija\Rz�

R Mb¢é zkù R Mb (1A) to rejoice RPbl\R `, RPbZl\R `, RPbc\R `, RPb², RPbZ�\R `, RPbßR `,

RPb �, RPb\az�, RPb\Rz�

jR M¢é ��Ì\e\R ` jR ` (1A) to play, to rejoice

jRl\R `, jR Zl\R `, jRc\R ` …

ÌM�^¢ék ` �\^ Z �^ ` (1A) to obtain �^l\R `, �^ Zl\R `, �^c\R ` …

}Qòé |\ý^\ fa Z }Q ` (4A) to be born }\el\R `, }\e Zl\R `, }\ec\R ` …

RQ¢é �\Q Z RQ ` (4A) to consider Røl\R `, RøZl\R `, Røc\R ` ...


54

�P� (Imperative Mood) – iRfh� |ePL� (Passive Voice)

Lês¢ LlÂ LR ` (1P) to go L¸l\R ` (May it be reached), L¸Zl\R `, L¸c\R `,

L¸², L¸Z�\R `, L¸ßR `, L¸ �, L¸\az�, L¸\Rz�

qË¢ ¨p\e\� a\hd qË(1P) to study ql\R `, q Zl\R `, qc\R ` ...

�k M¢ �Û\e\R ` �k ` (6P) to wish �_l\R `, �_Zl\R `, �_c\R ` ...

R Méd í¢ õ RP¦�Z R Md ` (6U) to set free R M�l\R `, R M� Zl\R `, R M�c\R ` ...

�\ gaoP[Q Z �\ (9P) to know �\el\R `, �\e Zl\R `, �\ec\R ` ...

w ¢ wpÂ wi (5P) to be able w»l\R `, w»Zl\R `, w»c\R ` ...

�¦¢é bw fQ Z �¦ ` (1A) to see ��l\R `, �� Zl\R `, ��c\R ` ...

ÌM�^¢ék ` �\^ Z �^ ` (1A) to obtain �Ol\R `, �OZl\R `, �Oc\R ` …

¦R½¢ék ` nzQ Z ¦R ` (1A) to pardon ¦¸l\R `, ¦¸Zl\R `, ¦¸c\R ` ...

Assignment on Conjugation in �P�


� Do the �P� portion of Exercise #7 in the last part of this book.


55

5. �m (Simple Past Tense)

�m (Simple Past Tense) is used to express an action in the past, but not of today.

Modification of hlm-|�es in �m

hlm-|�es modified for �m

This is the standard for �i\js with m at the end (hml-�i\j).



3rd person l ` l\R ` gQ ` l �l\R ` gc

2nd person : lR ` l �\� ��\R ` ßR `

1st person gR ` a R � ahz Rhz

In qj��qb,

� III/2, II/2, II/3, I/1 becomes l\R `, lR `, l, gR `, respectively.

� For others, � and n ` at the end disappear. For III/3, l ` also disappears.

In ��Q Zqb,

� III/3 becomes gc.

� Others remain in the original forms.

Modification of g� in �m


|ePLs.

� An augment “g” is added before the [\l M.

E.g., gLÛl ` = LR ` (1P) + �m/il fhj/III/1

E.g., | + gQæel ` = Qw ` (4P) + �m/il fhj/III/1

Note that the augment comes before the [\l M, not the �qnL f.

� If the [\l M begins with vowel, “�” is added and ashu takes place with the beginning

letter of the [\l M.

E.g., Ò¦l = �¦ ` (1A) + �m/il fhj/III/1 = � + �¦ + l `


56

^½ nt\e\R ` – ^½ to be (1P) in �m (Simple Past Tense) – il fhj |ePL� (Active Voice)

adQR ` q MNk�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�Rq MNk�

(3rd person) gâl ` III/1

He was gâl\R ` III/2

Those two were gâQ ` III/3

They all were R®Rq MNk�

(2nd person) gâ� II/1

You were gâlR ` II/2

You two were gâl II/3

You all were �tRq MNk�

(1st person) gâR ` I/1

I was gâ\a I/2

We two were gâ\R I/3

We all were

gn M¢ ^ Mha – gn ` to be (2P) in �m (Simple Past Tense) – il fhj |ePL� (Active Voice)

adQR ` q MNk�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�Rq MNk�

(3rd person) �n�l ` III/1

He was

�³\R ` III/2

Those two were

�nQ ` III/3

They all were

R®Rq MNk�

(2nd person) �n�� II/1

You were

�³R ` II/2

You two were

�³ II/3

You all were

�tRq MNk�

(1st person) �nR ` I/1

I was

�² I/2

We two were

�� I/3

We all were

Lês¢ LlÂ LR ` (1P) to go gLÛl ` (he went), gLÛl\R `, gLÛQ `...

ab¢ ¨p\e\� a\hd ab (1P) to say gabl ` (he said), gabl\R `, gabQ ` ...

áhw¢ | Z¦�Z áw ` (1P) to see gqæel ` (he saw), gqæel\R `, gqæeQ ` ...

�\é LhlhQastÂ î\ (1P) to stay ghl�l `, ghl�l\R `, ghl�Q `...

�w¢ gbwfQ Z Qw ` (4P) to perish gQæel `, gQæel\R `, gQæeQ ` ...

nsé}¢ hanLù ns} ` (6P) to create gns}l `, gns}l\R `,gns}Q ` ...

ÌMis Ê ` ij�Z is (8U) to do gijPl `, giMNl\R `, giMa fQ `, gijP�, giMNlR `, giMNl, gijaR `, giMa f, giMR f

/giMNl, giMa\ fl\R `,giMa fl, giM�\ f�, giMa\ f�\R ` giMNßR `, giM ha f, giMa fhz, giMR fhz

�¦¢é bw fQ Z �¦ ` (1A) to see Ò¦l, Ò¦ Zl\R `, Ò¦c, Ò¦�\�, Ò¦ Z�\R `, Ò¦ßR `, Ò¦ Z, Ò¦ahz, Ò¦Rhz


57

R Mb¢é zkù R Mb (1A) to rejoice gRPbl, gRPbZl\R `, gRPbc …

}Qòé |\ý^\ fa Z }Q ` (4A) to be born g}\el, g}\e Zl\R `, g}\ec …

�m (Simple past tense) – iR fh� |ePL� (Passive Voice)

Lês¢ LlÂ LR ` (1P) to go gL¸l (It has been reached), gL¸Zl\R `, gL¸c ...

qË¢ ¨p\e\� a\hd qË (1P) to study gql (It has been studied), gq Zl\R `, gqc ...

áhw¢ | Z¦�Z áw ` (1P) to see gáæel, gáæeZl\R `, gáæec ...

�¦¢é bw fQ Z �¦ ` (1A) to see Ò�l, Ò� Zl\R `, Ò�c ...

RQ¢é �\Q Z RQ ` (4A) to consider gRøl, gRøZl\R `, gRøc ...

Assignment on Conjugation in �m


� Do the �m portion of Exercise #7 in the last part of this book.


58

6. hah[h�m (Potential Mood)

hah[h�m (Potential Mood) is used to express a command, wish, etc., and also is used

in making a conditional or hypothetical sentence. E.g., e� ��j� �jZl ` lñ w\hc� ñ\l ` S (If one

remembers Īśvara, there will be happiness for him.)

Modification of hlm-|�es in hah[h�m

hlm-|�es modified for hah[h�m

qj��qb [parasmaipada] ��Q Zqb [ātmanepada]


3rd person �l/e\l ` �l\R/e\l\R ` �e M�/e M� �l �e\l\R ` �jQ `

2nd person ��/e\� �lR/e\lR ` �l/e\l ��\n ` �e\�\R ` �ßR `

1st person �eR/e\R ` �a/e\a �R/e\R �e �ahz �Rhz

� The standard |�es for hml ` are used as a basis.

In qj��qb,

� e\ is attached before the |�es.

� III/3 becomes e Mn `.

� If the g� is ending with g, the e\ is replaced by �e `. The e ` is elided when |�e starts

with consonant. The g at the end of g� and � of �e ` together becomes v by L M�-nh��.

In ��Q Zqb,

� III/3 and I/1 are replaced by jQ ` and g, respectively.

� �e ` is attached. The e ` at the end is elided when |�e starts with consonant.

Modification of g� in hah[h�m


|ePLs.


59

^½ nt\e\R ` – ^½ to be (1P) in hah[h�m (Potential Mood) – il fhj |ePL� (Active Voice)

adQR ` q MNk�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�Rq MNk�

(3rd person) âZl ` III/1

May he be

âZl\R ` III/2

May those two be

âZe M� III/3

May they be

R®Rq MNk�

(2nd person) âZ� II/1

May you be

âZlR ` II/2

May you two be

âZl II/3

May you all be

�tRq MNk�

(1st person) âZeR ` I/1

May I be

âZa I/2

May we two be

âZR I/3

May we be

Lês¢ LlÂ LR ` (1P) to go LÛZl ` (May one go), LÛZl\R `, LÛZe M�...

qË¢ ¨p\e\� a\hd qË (1P) to study qËZl ` (May one study), qËZl\R `, qËZe M�...

áhw¢ | Z¦�Z áw ` (1P) to see qæe Zl `, qæe Zl\R `, qæe Ze M� ...

�sé hdc\e\R ` �s (1P) to remember �jZl `, �jZl\R `, �jZe M� ...

® �é hdc\e\R ` ® � (1P) to contemplate ®\e Zl `, ®\e Zl\R `, ®\e Ze M� ...

�w¢ gbwfQ Z Qw ` (4P) to perish Qæe Zl `, Qæe Zl\R `, Qæe Ze M� ...

nsé}¢ hanLù ns} ` (6P) to create ns} Zl `, ns} Zl\R `, ns} Ze M� ...

gn M¢ ^ Mha – gn ` to be (2P) in hah[h�m (Potential Mood) – il fhj |ePL� (Active Voice)

adQR ` q MNk�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�Rq MNk�

(3rd person) ñ\l ` III/1

May he be ñ\l\R ` III/2

May those two be ñ M� III/3

May they be R®Rq MNk�

(2nd person) ñ\� II/1

May you be ñ\lR ` II/2

May you two be ñ\l II/3

May you all be �tRq MNk�

(1st person) ñ\R ` I/1

May I be ñ\a I/2

May we two be ñ\R I/3

May we be


60

�q í¢ ¨\�Â �q ` (5P) to pervade �� Me\l `, �� Me\l\R `, �� Me M� ..

�\ gaoP[Q Z �\ (9P) to know }\Q�e\l `, }\Q�e\l\R `, }\Q�e M�,

ÌMis Ê ` ij�Z is (8U) to do iMe\ fl `, iMe\ fl\R `, iMe Mf�, iMe\ f�, iMe\ flR `, iMe\ fl, iMe\ fR `, iMe\ fa, iMe\ fR

/iMa�l, iMa�e\l\R ` iMa�jQ `, iMa��\�, iMa�e\�\R `, iMa�ßR `, iMa�e, iMa�ahz, iMa�Rhz

asl M¢é al fQ Z asl ` (1A) to be alùl, alùe\l\R `, alùjQ `, alù�\�, alùe\�\R `, alùßR `, alùe, alùahz, alùRhz

ÌM�^¢ék ` �\^ Z �^ ` (1A) to obtain �^ Zl, �^ Ze\l\R `, �^ ZjQ `, �^ Z�\�, �^ Ze\�\R `, �^ ZjQ `, �^ Ze, �^ Zahz, �^ ZRhz

jR M¢é ��Ì\e\R ` jR ` (1A) to rejoice jRZl, jR Ze\l\R `, jR ZjQ ` ...

R Mb¢é zkù R Mb (1A) to rejoice RPbZl, RPbZe\l\R `, RPbZjQ ` …

}Qòé |\ý^\ fa Z }Q ` (4A) to be born }\e Zl, }\e Ze\l\R `, }\e ZjQ ` …

RQ¢é �\Q Z RQ ` (4A) to consider RøZl, RøZe\l\R `, RøZjQ ` ...

hah[h�m (Potential mood) – iR fh� |ePL� (Passive Voice)

Lês¢ LlÂ LR ` (1P) to go L¸Zl (May it be reached), L¸Ze\l\R `, L¸ZjQ `,

L¸Z�\�, L¸Ze\�\R `, L¸ZßR `, L¸Ze, L¸Zahz, L¸ZRhz

áhw¢j | Z¦�Z áw ` (1P) to see áæe Zl, áæe Ze\l\R `, áæe ZjQ ` ...

ÌM�^¢ék ` �\^ Z �^ ` (1A) to obtain �OZl, �OZe\l\R `, �OZjQ ` …

Assignment on Conjugation in hah[h�m


� Do the hah[h�m portion of Exercise #7 in the last part of this book.


61

7. �w�h�fm (Benedictive Mood)

�w�h�fm (Benedictive Mood) is used to express a wish or blessing.

Modification of hlm-|�es in �w�h�fm

hlm-|�es modified for �w�h�fm



3rd person e\l ` e\³\R ` e\n M� n�ó n�e\³\R ` n�jQ `

2nd person e\� e\³R ` e\³ n��\� n�e\î\R ` n�ßR `

1st person e\nR ` e\² e\� n�e n�ahz n�Rhz


In qj��qb,

� III/3 becomes �n `.

� e\n ` is attached before the |�es.

� The n ` of e\n ` is elided before III/1 and II/1.

In ��Q Zqb,

� III/3 and I/1 are replaced by jQ ` and g, respectively.

� n ` is attached before l ` and � ` of |�es

� n�e ` is attached. The e ` at the end is elided when the |�e starts with a consonant.

Modification of g� in �w�h�fm

� L M� does not take place in qj��qb. In ��Q Zqb, L M� takes place if applicable.


62

^½ to be (1P) and gn ` to be (2P) in �w�h�fm (Benedictive Mood) – il fhj |ePL� (Active Voice)

* gn ` declines in the same manner as ^½ in �w�h�fm.

adQR ` q MNk�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�Rq MNk�

(3rd person) ^½e\l ` III/1

May he be

^½e\³\R ` III/2

May those two be

^½e\n M� III/3

May they be

R®Rq MNk�

(2nd person) ^½e\� II/1

May you be

^½e\³R ` II/2

May you two be

^½e\³ II/3

May you all be

�tRq MNk�

(1st person) ^½e\nR ` I/1

May I be

^½e\² I/2

May we two be

^½e\� I/3

May we be

Lês¢ LlÂ LR ` (1P) to go L¸\l ` (May one reach), L¸\³\R `, L¸\n M� ...

v[¢é asuÂ v[ ` (1A) to grow vh[k�ó, vh[k�e\³\R `, vh[k�jQ `,

vh[k��\�, vh[k�e\î\R `, vh[k�ßR `, vh[k�e, vh[k�ahz, vh[k�Rhz

Assignment on Conjugation in �w�h�fm

� Do the �w�h�fm portion of Exercise #7 in the last part of this book.


63

8. �m (General Past Tense)

�m (General Past Tense) is used to express an action in the general past.

Modification of hlm-|�es in �m

hlm-|�es modified for �m

The standard |�es for hml ` are used.



3rd person l ` l\R ` gQ/�n ` l �l\R ` gc

2nd person : lR ` l �\� ��\R ` ßR `

1st person gR ` a R � ahz Rhz


� To these standard forms, there are many changes according to [\l M. This is well

explained through Pā=ini-sūtras.

Modification of g� in �m

� According to [\l M, extra suffix n `, n, or g is added.

� Like for �m, an augment “g/�” is added before the g�.

^½ to be (1P) and gn ` to be (2P) in �m (General Past Tense) – il fhj |ePL� (Active Voice)

* gn ` declines in the same manner as ^½ in �m.

adQR ` q MNk�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�Rq MNk�

(3rd person) g^½l ` III/1

He was g^½l\R ` III/2

Those two were g^½aQ ` III/3

They all were R®Rq MNk�

(2nd person) g^½� II/1

You were g^½lR ` II/2

You two were g^½l II/3

You all were �tRq MNk�

(1st person) g^½aR ` I/1

I was g^½a I/2

We two were g^½R I/3

We all were


64

ab¢ ¨p\e\� a\hd ab (1P) to say, to tell ga\b�l ` (He said), a\hbó\R `,a\hbk M�,

ga\b��, ga\hbóR `, ga\hbó, ga\hbkR `, ga\hb�, ga\hb

b�qòé b��Â b�q ` (4A) to shine gb�hq/gb�hqó, gb�hqk\l\R `, gb�hqkl,

gb�hq�\�, gb�hqk\�\R `, gb�hq�R `, gb�hqhk, gb�hq�hz, gb�hq hz

Note: when used with R\, a word indidicating prohibition, a verb in �m does not

convey the sense of past. It simply conveys “Do not do …”. In this case, the augment g/�

is not attached. E.g., R\ ^½�S Do not be.

Assignment on Conjugation in �m

� Do the �m portion of Exercise #7 in the last part of this book.


65

9. �sm (Conditional Mood)

�sm (Conditional Mood) is used to express a condition. hlmcs in �sm are rarely seen.

Modification of hlm-|�es in �sm

hlm-|�es modified for �sm



3rd person ñl ` ñl\R ` ñQ ` ñl ñZl\R ` ñc

2nd person ñ� ñlR ` ñl ñ�\� ñZ�\R ` ñßR `

1st person ñR ` ñ\a ñ\R ñZ ñ\ahz ñ\Rhz


� “ñ”, an additional suffix to the [\l M, is attached to hlm-|�es in this chart.

Modification of g� in �sm

� If the [\l M is marked “S” in [\l MiPw�, � is added before ñ, the additional suffix. In this

case, ñ becomes _, together resulting in �_.


� Like for �m, an augment “g/�” is added before the g�.

^½ to be (1P) and gn ` to be (2P) in �sm (Conditional Mood) – il fhj |ePL� (Active Voice)

* gn ` declines in the same manner as ^½ in �sm.

adQR ` q MNk�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�Rq MNk�

(3rd person) g^ha_l ` III/1

He could be g^ha_l\R ` III/2

Those two could be g^ha_Q ` III/3

They all could be R®Rq MNk�

(2nd person) g^ha_� II/1

You could be g^ha_lR ` II/2

You two could be g^ha_l II/3

You all could be �tRq MNk�

(1st person) g^ha_R ` I/1

I could be g^ha_\a I/2

We two could be g^ha_\R I/3

We all could be


66

ÌMis éÊ ` ij�Z is (8U) to do gihj_l ` (He could have done), gihj_l\R `, gihj_Q ` …

/gihj_l, gihj_Zl\R `, gihj_c,

gihj_�\�, gihj_Z�\R `, gihj_ßR `, gihj_Z, gihj_\ahz, gihj_\Rhz

Examples:

n Mashó� 1/1 d Zl ` 0 g^ha_l ` III/1 lb\ 0 n Mh^¦R ` 1/1 g^ha_l ` III/1S

If there were a good rain, then it could have been plenty of food.

ehb vlb haah¦lR ` g^ha_l `, n� ll ` ga�l ` S

If this was intended, he would have said that.

Topic VII – The Concept of Nouns (n MocR ` [subantam])

67

Topic VII

The Concept of

Nouns (n MocR ` [subantam])

1. What is noun (n MocR ` [subantam])?

As seen so far, there are only two types of words in Sanskrit language: verb (hlmc�

qbR), that which ends (gc) with verbal suffix (hlm), and noun (n Moc� qbR), that which ends

with nominal suffix (n Mq).

In a sentence in Sanskrit, there has to be one verb, either written or implied. All

other words are nouns. All these nouns are connected to the verb, either directly or

indirectly.

A noun conveys a thing or person and how it is connected to the verb in the

sentence.

2. Constituents of noun (n MocR ` [subantam])

The literal meaning of n MocR ` is that which ends with n Mq ` [sup].

n Mq ` is a type of |�e� (suffix), which can be called nominal suffix.

n MocR ` consists of two elements:

Noun (n MocR ` [subantam])

= Nominal base (|\hlqhbiR ` [prātipadikam]) + Nominal suffix (n Mq-|�e� [sup-pratyaya7])

A |\hlqhbiR ` [prātipadikam] indicates a thing or a person. n Mq-|�e� [sup-pratyaya7]

indicates how that thing or person is connected to the verb in a sentence.


68

By suffixing different nominal suffixes (n Mq-|�es) to a |\hlqhbiR `, according to the

relationship to the verb and the number, different forms of nouns (n Mocs) are produced.

This is what we call “declension of noun”.

Observe how a noun is declined from a single |\hlqhbi into twenty-one different

forms by suffixing twenty-one different suffixes according to seven types of cases and

three numbers.

That which immediately precedes the suffix is called g� [a�ga]. So, when a n Mq-|�e

[sup-pratyaya] is suffixed to a |\hlqhbi, the |\hlqhbi is given the status of g�. It is the g�

which then undergoes any necessary modifications based on the n Mq-|�e. n Mq-|�es also

undergo some changes based on gender and ending-letter of the |\hlqhbi.

j\R This is original |\hlqhbi by itself.

(|\hlqhbiR)

j\R + mZ A n Mq-|�e is suffixed. Then |\hlqhbi gains the status of g�.

(g�R) (|�e�)

j\R + e n Mq-|�e is modified according to gender and ending of |\hlqhbi.

j\R\ + e g� is modified according to n Mq-|�e.

Num.

Case

Sing-ular

Dual Plural

1st case j\R� j\RÂ j\R\�

2nd case j\RR ` j\RÂ j\R\Q `

3rd case j\R Z� j\R\O\R ` j\R ��

4th case j\R\e j\R\O\R ` j\R ZO�

5th case j\R\l ` j\R\O\R ` j\R ZO�

6th case j\Rñ j\ReP� j\R\�\R `

7th case j\R Z j\ReP� j\R Zk M

Num.

Case

Sing-ular

Dual Plu-ral

1st case n M¢ Ô }n `

2nd case gR ` Ô� wn `

3rd case �\ O\R ` h^n `

4th case mZ O\R ` On `

5th case mhn¢ O\R ` On `

6th case mn ` Ón ` �R `

7th case hm Ón ` n Mq `

j\R [rāma] =

+

n MocR ` (nouns) n Mq|�e� (nominal suffixes) |\hlqhbiR ` (nominal base)


69

3. Classification of |\hlqhbi [prātipadika]

|\hlqhbis are classified in two ways:

i. Gender (masculine, feminine, and neuter)

ii. Ending letter of |\hlqhbi

This two-fold classification is the factor which makes the difference in declension

among different |\hlqhbis.

i. Genders

In Sanskrit language, there are three genders for nouns.

1. Masculine (q M�-h�� [puÖ-li�ga7])

2. Feminine (��-h�� [strī-li�ga7])

3. Neuter (Qq M�ni-h�� [napuÖsaka-li�ga7])

Every |\hlqhbi has one of the genders in two ways:

A. Some |\hlqhbis intrinsically have their own gender.

B. Some |\hlqhbis are adjective/qualifier. Then the gender of the qualified is

given to the |\hlqhbi.

A. |\hlqhbis which have genders intrinsically.

� Gender is just given to a |\hlqhbi in the language.

E.g., as¦ (tree) is a masculine |\hlqhbi.

E.g., R\�\ (garland) is a feminine |\hlqhbi.

E.g., Ð� (fruit) is a neuter |\hlqhbi.

E.g., b Zz (body) is a masculine |\hlqhbi.

E.g., lQ½ (body) is a feminine |\hlqhbi.

E.g., wj�j (body) is a neuter |\hlqhbi.

� The gender of |\hlqhbi and the actual gender of the meaning of the |\hlqhbi do not

have to match.

E.g., b\j (wife) is a masculine |\hlqhbi.


70

E.g., b Zal\ (deity) is a feminine |\hlqhbi.

� Gender can be decided by how the |\hlqhbi was derived.

E.g., �\Q, b\Q, n\[Q, ij� are neuter |\hlqhbis.

E.g., l�, R MR M¦ Mì, a �j\�e, Ò» are neuter |\hlqhbis.

E.g., whp, |is hl, R Mhp, ^hp are feminine |\hlqhbis.

� One |\hlqhbi can have more than one gender.

E.g., �k M (arrow) is a masculine and feminine |\hlqhbi.

� One |\hlqhbi can have more than one meaning, and according to the meaning, the

gender may differ.

E.g., hR¾ in the sense of friend is a neuter |\hlqhbi.

E.g., hR¾ in the sense of the Sun God is a masculine |\hlqhbi.

B. |\hlqhbis which do not have gender of their own

� Gender is given to a |\hlqhbi by another word which is qualified by the |\hlqhbi.

E.g., When b�Ç f (tall) is qualifying as¦ (tree, masculine), it is used as masculine.

b�Ç f� as¦� (a tall tree)

E.g., When w Mª (white) is qualifying R\�\ (garland, feminine), it is used as

feminine.10

w Mª\ R\�\ (a white garland)

E.g., When qhll (fallen) is qualifying Ð� (fruit, neuter), it is used as neuter.

Ð�� qhllR ` (a fruit is fallen.)

ii. Ending letters

Ending letter is as important as gender in terms of how |\hlqhbi declines.

For some |\hlqhbis, the manner of declension is not only influenced by the last letter,

but also by the last two letters, or how the word was derived.

10 If applicable, a feminine suffix (��|�e�) such as � or � is suffixed.


71

Distinguishing |\hlqhbi by gender and ending letter

Conventionally, letters in Sanskrit are named by adding “i\j” at the end.

E.g., g is called gi\j. � is called �i\j.

E.g., n ` is called ni\j. Q ` is called Qi\j. (g is added after the consonant, before

“i\j”, for the purpose of pronunciation.)

|\hlqhbis are given conventional names according to the two ways of classification

(gender and ending letter).

E.g., j\R is g-ending masculine |\hlqhbi (gi\j-gc-q M�h��-|\hlqhbiR).

E.g., R\�\ is �-ending feminine |\hlqhbi (�i\j-gc-��h��-|\hlqhbiR).

E.g., a\d ` is d-ending feminine |\hlqhbi (di\j-gc-��h��-|\hlqhbiR).

E.g., RQn ` is n-ending neuter |\hlqhbi (ni\j-gc-Qq M�nih��-|\hlqhbiR).

Some |\hlqhbis have to be identified by the last few letters because of differences in

declension.

E.g., ��Q ` is gQ-ending masculine |\hlqhbi (gQ-gc-q M�h��-|\hlqhbiR).

E.g., ePhLQ ` is �Q-ending masculine |\hlqhbi (�Q-gc-q M�h��-|\hlqhbiR).

Some |\hlqhbis have to be identified by how the |\hlqhbis are derived because of

differences in declension.

E.g., ^Lal ` is Rl M¢q-suffix-ending masculine |\hlqhbi (Rl M¢-gc-q M�h��-|\hlqhbiR).

E.g., qdl ` is wls¢-suffix-ending masculine |\hlqhbi (wls¢-gc-q M�h��-|\hlqhbiR).

More basic categorization of |\hlqhbis is:

• Vowel-ending (g}c [ajanta]) 11, that which ends (gc) with vowel (gd)

• Consonant-ending (z�c [halanta]), that which ends (gc) with consonant (z�)

11 Refer R\zZ�jn½¾\h� in Volume 2 for gd `, abbreviation of vowels. Also, refer Pā=ini-sūtra 8.2.39 in

z�-nh�� in Volume 2 for how d ` of gd ` changes into } ` in g}c.


72

4. Nominal suffix (n Mq-|�e� [sup-pratyaya7])

n Mq-|�es indicate two things.

i. Case (ha^hp� [vibhakti7])

There are seven cases (ha^hps) from 1st to 7th, whose meanings (ha^hp-g�\ f�)

will be studied in the next topic.


There are three numbers (adQs): singular (vi-adQR), dual (h�-adQR), and

plural (oè-adQR).

By these two factors (case and number), every suffix of twenty-one n Mq-|�es is

unique, as seen in the chart below.

Number Case


1st case n M¢ [su] Ô [au] }n ` [jas]

2nd case gR ` [am] Ô� [au;] wn ` [śas]

3rd case �\ [;ā] O\R ` [bhyām] h^n ` [bhis]

4th case mZ [�e] O\R ` [bhyām] On ` [bhyas]

5th case mhn¢ [�asi] O\R ` [bhyām] On ` [bhyas]

6th case mn ` [�as] Ón ` [os] �R ` [ām]

7th case hm [�i] Ón ` [os] n Mq ` [sup]

n Mq-|�es are suffixed to |\hlqhbi to convey:

i. The role which the |\hlqhbi plays in the sentence by case (ha^hp�)

ii. The number of |\hlqhbi by number (adQR)


73

5. Objectives of learning n MocR `

The objectives are to be able to:

1) Identify |\hlqhbi, ha^hp and adQ

The n Moc� qbR ` will be marked in the format of:

n MocR ` = |\hlqhbiR ` + n Mq ` (ha^hp�/ adQR)

E.g., j\R\e = j\R (Rāma) + 4th case/Singular

= j\R + 4/1

2) Determine the meaning of ha^hp (ha^hp-g� f) and connect in the sentence.

This can be done by fulfilling �i\m¦\ in the form of asking and answering

questions. This method is explained by the example below.

For example, in the sentence “j\R� n�le\ nz q M�\h� qæehl S”

1) Locate the hlmcqb first and mark it. qæehl áw ` (1P) to see + ��/il fhj/III/1

2) Mark all the n Mocqbs - “j\R� 1/1 n�le\ 3/1 nz 0 q M�\h� 2/3 qæehl III/1 S”

3) Ask questions to find out i\ji and non-i\ji by asking questions and finding ha^hp-g� f

of the n Mocqbs.

Q: Who sees? (i� 1/1 qæehl?) – Look for 1st case since the hlmc is in il fhj |ePL�.

A: j\R� 1/1 qæehl – Of the word j\R�, |\hlqhbi is j\R, which is gi\j\c-q M�h��w{� in il fhj |�R\

to qæehl, in singular (1/1).

Q: What does he see? (i\hQ 2/3 qæehl?) – Look for 2nd case since in il fhj |ePL� undenoted

iR f is told in 2nd case.

A: q M�\h� 2/3 qæehl – Of the word q M�\h�, |\hlqhbi is q M�, which is gi\j\c-Qq M�nih��w{�, in

iR fh� h�l�e\ to qæehl, in plural (2/3)

Q: With whom does he see? (ie\ 3/1 nz qæehl?) – Look for 3rd case since a word

connected to nz (together) is told in 3rd case.

A: n�le\ 3/1 nz 0 qæehl – Of the word n�le\, |\hlqhbi is n�l\, which is �i\j\c-��h��w{�,

in nz lsl�e\ in singular (3/1); nz is gëR ` (0).

Topic VIII – Meanings of Case Endings (ha^��\ f� [vibhaktyarthā7])

74

Topic VIII

Meanings of case endings

(ha^��\ f� [vibhaktyarthā7])

This section will be well comprehended when studied along with the next topics on

declension.

Basic concepts of ha^hp� [vibhakti7] (case ending)

In Sanskrit language, every noun ends with a nominal suffix (n Mq-|�e� [sup-

pratyaya7]).

Nominal suffixes (n Mq-|�es) are twenty-one in number and they are divided into

seven cases (ha^hps [vibhakti]s) and three numbers, as seen in the chart below.

ha^hp� literally means “division”. The n Mq-|�es are divided into seven, and each

division is called “|�R\ ha^hp� (1st division)”, “h�l�e\ ha^hp� (2nd division)”, and so on.

ha^hp (Division) of n Mq-|�es (nominal suffixes)

Number ha^hp� (division)


|�R\ [prathamā] (1st) n M¢ Ô }n `

h�l�e\ [dvitīyā] (2nd) gR ` Ô� wn `

lsl�e\ [t6tīyā] (3rd) �\ O\R ` h^n `

dl M�� [caturthī] (4th) mZ O\R ` On `

qrR� [pañcamī] (5th) mhn¢ O\R ` On `

k�� [:a:;hī] (6th) mn ` Ón ` �R `

n�R� [saptamī] (7th) hm Ón ` n Mq `


75

Each ha^hp conveys different meanings. The meaning (g� f [artha]) of ha^hp is called

ha^�� f [vibhaktyartha]. A ha^�� f expresses the role of |\hlqhbi played in the sentence.

The seven ha^hps are employed to convey two things:

A. i\ji (factors of action)

When a ha^hp is conveying i\ji [kāraka], it is called i\ji-ha^hp�.

Refer back to the topic of i\ji, if necessary.

B. Things other than i\ji (non-i\ji)

When a ha^hp is conveying things other than i\ji, it is called non-i\ji-ha^hp�.

ha^hps are called by different names as seen in the chart below. To avoid the

possible confusion caused by mixing up i\ji and ha^hp, in this book we refer to the ha^hp

by the numerical names (1, |�R\, or 1st case) rather than the other names (nominative, etc.),

which are also associated with i\ji.

Different names for ha^hps

ha^hp� Case English term

|�R\ ha^hp� 1st case Nominative

h�l�e\ ha^hp� 2nd case Accusative

lsl�e\ ha^hp� 3rd case Instrumental

dl M�� ha^hp� 4th case Dative

qrR� ha^hp� 5th case Ablative

k�� ha^hp� 6th case Genitive

n�R� ha^hp� 7th case Locative


76

1. |�R\ ha^hp� (First Case)

1st case is employed to express:

A. i\ji-ha^hp�

� il\ f (agent) of a hlmc (verb) in il fhj |ePL (active voice)

� The 1st case which is in the sense of il\ f is called il fhj |�R\ [kartari prathamā]

E.g., b Zabt� 1/1 qæehl III/1 S (Devadatta sees.)

• The verb is in il fhj |ePL (active voice).

• With reference to the action of the verb, bZabt is il\ f.

• Thus bZabt is in the 1st case.

� iRf (object) in iR fh� |ePL (passive voice)

� The 1st case which is in the sense of iR f is called iR fh� |�R\ [karma=i prathamā]

E.g., L}\� 1/3 áæecZ III/3 S (The elephants are seen.)

• The verb is in iR fh� |ePL (passive voice).

• With reference to the action of the verb, L} is iR f.

• Thus L} is in the 1st case.

B. Non-i\ji-ha^hp�

� Address to get the attention of the listener (n�P[QR ` [sambodhanam])

E.g., zZ 0 j\R S/1 R\R ` 2/1 q\hz II/1 S (Oh Rāma! protect me.)

E.g., zZ 0 b Za\� S/3 R\R ` 2/1 q\l II/3 S (Oh Devas! protect me.)

• Even though there are only seven ha^hps and n�P[Q is a type of 1st case, the

letter S is utilized for indicating n�P[Q in this book. This is because for some

words the singular form of n�P[Q is different from the general 1st case singular

form. E.g., j\R� 1/1, j\R S/1.


77

2. h�l�e\ ha^hp� (Second Case)

2nd case is employed to express:

A. i\ji-ha^hp�

� iRf (object) in il fhj |ePL (active voice)

� The 2nd case which is in the sense of iR f is called iR fh� h�l�e\ [karma=i dvitīyā]

E.g., b Zabt� 1/1 L}\Q ` 2/3 qæehl III/1 S (Devadatta sees elephants.)

• The verb is in il fhj |ePL (active voice).

• With reference to the action of the verb, L} is iR f.

• Thus L} is in the 2nd case.

� A destination of a going or moving action is also considered to be a iR f (object).

4th case is also taken optionally.

E.g., b Zabt� 1/1 y\RR ` 2/1/ or y\R\e 4/1 LÛhl III/1 S (Devadatta goes to village.)

• y\R is iR f of the hlmc, therefore it is in the 2nd or 4th case.


� A word connected to the following words: (These words “govern” the 2nd case.)

o |hl (indeclinable, towards)

E.g., RP¦R ` 2/1 |hl 0 �Û\ 1/1 âhl III/1 S (There is a desire towards liberation.)

o gQ M (indeclinable, in keeping with, following)

E.g., �qbZwR ` 2/1 gQ M 0 n� 1/1 a Zb\Q ` 2/3 oP[hl III/1 S

(He understands the Vedas in keeping with the teaching.)

o gcjZ� (indeclinable, without)

E.g., q M¾R ` 2/1 gcjZ� 0 b Zabt� 1/1 Q 0 l M_hl III/1 S

(Without the son, Devadatta is not happy.)


78

3. lsl�e\ ha^hp� (Third Case)

3rd case is employed to convey:

A. i\ji-ha^hp�

� ij�R ` (instrument)

� The 3rd case which is in the sense of ij�R ` is called ij�Z lsl�e\ [kara=e t6tīyā]

E.g., 1) b Zabt� 1/1 z³ZQ 3/1 ÓbQR ` 2/1 Æ\bhl III/1 S (Devadatta eats the rice by hand.)

E.g., 2) ÓbQ� 1/1 z³ZQ 3/1 Æ\xlZ III/1 S (The rice is eaten by hand.)

• z³, a means to accomplish the action, is ij�R `, therefore it is in the 3rd case.

� il\ f (agent) in iR fh� |ePL (passive voice)

� The 3rd case which is in the sense of il\ f is called il fhj lsl�e\ [kartari t6tīyā]

E.g., 3) ÓbQ� 1/1 b ZabtZQ 3/1 z³ZQ 3/1 Æ\xlZ III/1 S (The rice is eaten by Devadatta by hand.)

• bZabt is il\ f of the hlmc, therefore it is in the 3rd case.


� zZl M (cause) of an action

� The 3rd case which is in the sense of zZl M is called zZlÂ lsl�e\ [hetau t6tīyā]

E.g., 1) q MÙe ZQ 3/1 RQ M_ìR ` 2/1 �^lZ III/1 S (One gains human birth because of pu=ya.)

• q MÙe is zZl M, therefore it is in the 3rd case.

� An indication through which a given thing is known

� The 3rd case in the sense of the indication is called �� ½l Z lsl�e\ [itthaÖbhūte t6tīyā]

E.g., 1) ��j� 1/1 na �� 3/3 ´q �� 3/3 gaL¸lZ III/1 S

(Īśvara is understood in the form of everything.)

E.g., 2) vll ` 1/1 ²´q Z� 3/1 hl�hl III/1 S

(This remains in its own form.)

� A word connected to “nz” (indeclinable, with) which governs 3rd case

� The 3rd case used for a word connected to “nz” is called nz-lsl�e\ [saha-t6tīyā]

E.g., �Ü�ZQ 3/1 nz 0 j\R� 1/1 LÛhl III/1 S (Rāma goes with Lak:ma=a.)


79

4. dl M�� ha^hp� (Fourth Case)

4th case is employed to convey:

A. i\ji-ha^hp�

� n�b\QR ` (recipient of action of giving, etc.)

� The 4th case which is in the sense of n�b\QR ` is called n�b\Q Z dl M�� [sampradāne caturthī]

E.g., 1) b Zabt� 1/1 h�}\e 4/1 [QR ` 2/1 bb\hl III/1 S (Devadatta gives money to a priest.)

• h�}, the recipient of action, is n�b\QR `, therefore it is in the 4th case.

E.g., 2) �d\e f� 1/1 hw_ZO� 4/3 w\�R ` 2/1 �qhbwhl III/1 S

(Teacher teaches the scripture to the disciples.)

• hw_, to whom the agent wants to connect by the action, is n�b\QR `, thus it is in

the 4th case.


� Purpose of action.

E.g., 1) q MÙe\e 4/1 b Za\Q ` 2/3 e}lZ III/1 S (One worships devas to gain puṇya.)

� A word connected to the following words which govern 4th case.

o QR� (indeclinable, salutation)

E.g., hwa\e 4/1 QR� 0 S (Salutation to Śiva.)

o ²h³ (indeclinable, welfare)

E.g., ²h³ 0 }Q ZO� 4/3S (May there be welfare for the people.)

o ²\z\ (indeclinable, an exclamation used in making oblations to the gods)

E.g., �§\e 4/1 ²\z\ 0 S (This oblation is to Indra.)

o Etc.


80

5. qrR� ha^hp� (Fifth Case)


A. i\ji-ha^hp�

� gq\b\QR ` (origin, etc.)

� The 5th case which is in the sense of gq\b\QR ` is called gq\b\Q Z qrR� [apādāne pañcamī]

E.g., 1) Ð�R ` 1/1 as¦\l ` 5/1 qlhl III/1 S (The fruit falls from the tree.)

• as¦, origin of action, is gq\b\QR `, therefore it is in the 5th case.

E.g., 2) b Zabt� 1/1 ¨\�\l ` 5/1 ho^ Zhl III/1 S (Devadatta is afraid of the tiger.)

• ¨\�, source of fear, is gq\b\QR `, therefore it is in the 5th case.

E.g., 3) ��j� 1/1 ý�Æ\l ` 5/1 Qj\Q ` 2/3 j¦hl III/1 S (Īśvara protects people from sorrow.)

• ý�Æ, from which one is protected, is gq\b\QR `, therefore it is in the 5th case.

E.g., 4) }�\l ` 5/1 iR�R ` 1/1 }\el Z III/1 S (Lotus is born of water.)

• }�, cause of birth, is gq\b\QR `, therefore it is in the 5th case.

E.g., 5) �q\®\e\l ` 5/1 ¨\ij�R ` 2/1 g[�l Z III/1 S (He studies grammar from the teacher.)

• �q\®\e, a teacher of formal learning, is gq\b\QR `, therefore it is in the 5th case.


81


� zZl M (cause) of an action [zZlÂ qrR�]

� The 5th case which is in the sense of zZl M is called zZlÂ qrR� [hetau pañcamī]

E.g., 1) qa fl� 1/1 ah R\Q ` 1/1 �hl 0 [½R\l ` 5/1 �\el Z III/1 S (“The mountain has fire.” is known beucase of smoke.)

� A thing or person from which another thing or person is distinguished.

� The 5th case used for such word is called ha^pZ qrR� [vibhakte pañcamī]

E.g., 1) RÂQ\l ` 5/1 n�R ` 1/1 hahw_lZ III/1 S (Speaking truth is greater than silence.)

� A referential point for words of direction in time and space. (hb!{s)

� The 5th case used for a word connected to hb!{ is called hb�ePL Z qrR� [digyoge pañcamī]

o q½a f (before, east)

E.g., �\Q\l ` 5/1 q½a f� 1/1 n�n\j� 1/1 S (Before the knowledge, there is n�n\j.)

o qj (after, superior)

E.g., �\Q\l ` 5/1 qj� 1/1 RP¦� 1/1 S (After the knowledge, there is RP¦.)

o �tj (after, above, north)

E.g., vl�\l ` 5/1 ^\L\l ` 5/1 �tj�1/1 ^\L� 1/1 gh³ III/1 S

(After this section, there is a section.)

o |\i (indeclinable, before)

E.g., �\Q\l ` 5/1 |\i 0 g�\QR ` 1/1 �n�l ` III/1 S

(Before the knowledge there was ignorance.)

o gQcjR ` (indeclinable, after)

E.g., "\Q\l ` 5/1 gQcjR ` 0 RhÃjR ` 2/1 LÛhl III/1 S

(After bathing he goes to the temple.)


82

� A word connected to the following words, which govern 5th case.

o gø (pronoun, another, other)

E.g., is «\l ` 5/1 gø� 1/1 nR� f� 1/1 Q 0 gh³ III/1 S (Nobody is capable other than is «.)

o �lj (pronoun, the other)

E.g., bh¦�\l ` 5/1 �lj� 1/1 a\R� 1/1 S (Left (hand) is the other than right (hand).)

o h^ (adjective, different)

E.g., l�\l ` 5/1 vk� 1/1 h^� 1/1 âhl III/1 S (This is different from that.)

o �lZ (indeclinable, without)

E.g., ��j\l ` 5/1 �lZ 0 ha�� 1/1 Q 0 al fl Z III/1 S (Without ��j, there is no world.)

� A word connected to the following words which govern 2nd, 3rd and 5th case.

o qs�i (indeclinable, without, apart from)

E.g., j\R� 2/1/ j\R Z� 3/1/ j\R\l ` 5/1 qs�i 0 is «� 1/1 QLj� 2/1 LÛhl III/1 S

(Without j\R is « goes to the city.)

o haQ\ (indeclinable, without, except)

E.g., �\Q � 2/1/ �\Q ZQ 3/1/ �\Q\l ` 5/1 haQ\ 0 n MÆ� 1/1 Q 0 âhl III/1 S

(Without knowledge there is no happiness.)


83

6. k�� ha^hp� (Sixth Case)



� n�� (connection, relationship) of a noun with another noun

� The 6th case used in the sense of connection is called n��Z k�� [sambandhe :a:;hī]

o In a phrase such as “A of B” or “A for B”, the B takes 6th case.

E.g., b Zabtñ 6/1 LszR ` 1/1 S (The house of bZabt)

E.g., ^p\Q\R ` 6/3 n MÆR ` 1/1 S (Happiness for the devotees)

o In a sentence such as “A has B”, the A takes 6th case.

E.g., b Zabtñ 6/1 q M³iR ` 1/1 gh³ III/1S (Devadatta has a book.)

o An abstract noun is often connected to 6th case ending word.

o Literally translated, “A has the status of B”. Simply translated, “A is B”.

E.g., b Zabtñ 6/1 gh[i\hjìR ` 1/1 S

= bZabt has the status of a qualified person.

= bZabt is a qualified person. (bZabt� 1/1 gh[i\j� 1/1 S)

E.g., Ç�ñ 6/1 g^\a\l ` 5/1 S (Because of the absence of a pot)

= Ç� has the absence.

= Ç� is absent. = Ç� is not there. (Ç�� 1/1 Q 0 gh³ III/1S)

� A group from which a selection (hQ[\ fj�) is made

� The 6th case used for that group is called hQ[\ fj� Z k�� [nirdhāra=e :a:;hī]

� Note that the selection belongs to the group. This is the difference from ha^pZ qrR�.

E.g., j\R�Ü�eP� 6/2 j\R� 1/1 ¥Z�� 1/1 S (Of j\R and �Ü�, j\R is the elder.)

E.g., Ð�\Q\R ` 6/3 �#Ð�R ` 1/1 R[ MjlR� 1/1 S (Among the fruits, mango is the sweetest.)


84

7. n�R� ha^hp� (Seventh Case)


A. i\ji-ha^hp�

� gh[ij�R ` (locus of agent or object of action)

� The 7th case used in the sense of gh[ij�R ` is called gh[ij�Z n�R� [adhikara=e saptamī]

E.g., 1) b Zabt� 1/1 Rz\Qn Z 7/1 qdhl III/1 S (Devadatta cooks in the kitchen.)

• Rz\Qn, locus of agent, is gh[ij�R `, therefore it is in the 7th case.

E.g., 2) b Zabt� 1/1 q\¾ Z 7/1 ÓbQR ` 2/1 qdhl III/1 S (Devadatta cooks rice in a vessel.)

• q\¾, locus of object, is gh[ij�R `, therefore it is in the 7th case.

E.g., 3) b Zabt� 1/1 q M¾ Z 7/1 h"ôhl III/1 S (Devadatta feels affection in his son.)

• q M¾, locus of interest or subject matter, is gh[ij�R `, therefore it is in the 7th case.

• When gh[ij� is particularly locus of interest or subject matter, the 7th case is

conventionally called hake-n�R� [vi:aya-saptamī].


85


� A word indicating an action

� The 7th case used in such sense is called nhl n�R� [sati saptamī]

E.g., 1) “when there is A, ~” q M¾ Z 7/1 nhl 7/1 b Zabt� 1/1 LszZ 7/1 hl�hl III/1 S

(When the son is there, Devadatta stays at home.)

E.g., 2) “when A is A’, ~” q M¾ Z 7/1 q Mó Z 7/1 nhl 7/1 b Zabt� 1/1 l Mó� 1/1 âhl III/1 S

( When the son is nourished, Devadatta is happy.)

o These sentences can be paraphrased in “eb\ (when) ~, lb\ (then) ~” structure.

E.g., 1) eb\ q M¾� âhl lb\ bZabt� LszZ hl�hl S

E.g., 2) eb\ q M¾� q Mó� âhl lb\ bZabt� l Mó� âhl S

o “nhl” is a 7th case singular declension of “nl ` (being)”.

o The gender and number agree with those of the noun.

• In masculine

hake Z 7/1 nhl 7/1 - when there is an object,

hakeeP� 7/2 nlP� 7/2 - when there are two objects,

hake Zk M 7/3 n� M 7/3 - when there are three or more objects,

• In neuter

i\j�Z 7/1 nhl 7/1 - when there is a cause,

i\j�eP� 7/2 nlP� 7/2 - when there are two causes,

i\j� Zk M 7/3 n� M 7/3 - when there are three or more causes,

• In feminine

w�\e\� 7/1 n�\R ` 7/1 - when there is a doubt,

w�eP� 7/2 n�P� 7/2 - when there are two doubts,

w�\n M 7/3 nl�k M 7/3 - when there are three or more doubts,

o The word “nhl” etc., may or may not be present in the sentence.


86

8. Summary table of ha^��\ f�

Case / ha^hp� Meaning of the case / ha^��\ f� 1st case |�R\ ha^hp�

A. i\ji-ha^hp� • il fhj (agent) |�R\ in active voice (il fhj |ePL Z) • iRfh� (object) |�R\ in passive voice (iR fh� |ePL Z)

B. Non-i\ji-ha^hp� • n�P[QR `

2nd case h�l�e\ ha^hp�

A. i\ji-ha^hp� • iRfh� (object) h�l�e\ in active voice (il fhj |ePL Z)

B. Non-i\ji-ha^hp� • |hl, gQ M, gcjZ�, etc.

3rd case lsl�e\ ha^hp�

A. i\ji-ha^hp� • il fhj (agent) lsl�e\ in passive voice (iR fh� |ePL Z) • ij�Z (instrument) lsl�e\

B. Non-i\ji-ha^hp� • zZlÂ (reason) lsl�e\ • �� ½l Z (in the form of ~) lsl�e\ • nz (with) lsl�e\

4th case dl M�� ha^hp�

A. i\ji-ha^hp� • n�b\Q Z (recipient) dl M��

B. Non-i\ji-ha^hp� • QR�, ²h³, ²\z\, etc.

5th case qrR� ha^hp�

A. i\ji-ha^hp� • gq\b\Q Z (origin) qrR�

B. Non-i\ji-ha^hp� • zZlÂ qrR� • ha^pZ qrR� • hb�ePL Z qrR� • gø, �lj, h^, �lZ, etc. • qs�i, haQ\, etc. (also take h�l�e\ and lsl�e\)

6th case k�� ha^hp�

B. Non-i\ji-ha^hp� • n��-k��

7th case n�R� ha^hp�

A. i\ji-ha^hp� • gh[ij�Z (locus) n�R�

B. Non-i\ji-ha^hp� • nhl n�R�

Topic IX – Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

87

Topic IX

Declension of

Vowel-ending Nominal bases

and Pronouns

Declension in Sanskrit is the making of different forms of nouns from one nominal

base (|\hlqhbi [prātipadika]) by adding different nominal suffixes (n Mq-|�es [sup-

pratyaya]s).

In this section, declensions of two types of |\hlqhbis are studied:

• |\hlqhbis ending with vowel (g}c-|\hlqhbi [ajanta-prātipadika])

• |\hlqhbis termed na fQ\R [sarvanāma]

They are studied together because of the similarity in how they decline.

Pronouns (na fQ\R [sarvanāma])

Among |\hlqhbis, thirty-five types of |\hlqhbis are grouped and called na fQ\R

[sarvanāma] in Sanskrit grammatical terminology. na fQ\Rs are more or less equivalent to

pronouns because they can represent any thing or person which has been mentioned

before. na fQ\Rs are grouped separately because their grammatical treatment, such as

declension and further transformation, is different from other |\hlqhbis.

na fQ\Rs can be in three genders and they decline according to their genders.

How to study declensions

The objective of studying the declension of nouns is to be able to identify the

declined noun forms with their case and number quickly and accurately.


88

The conventional practice is to memorize the whole declension chart by chanting

the whole chart at once. However, it is more practical and efficient to associate each

declined form with case and number individually. For example, when a student looks at

the form “j\R\�\R”, to identify its case and number in conventional way, he has to chant

through almost the whole declension from the beginning, without losing count. Instead, it

is far better to be able to identify the form “j\R\�\R” as “6/3” by sight. For achieving that,

case and number are clearly written next to each declined form in this book.

The ways of declension differ by the gender and ending letter (or letters), and

sometimes other factors. Because of this, there are so many different paradigms (ways of

declension). However, there are some similarities and patterns among certain paradigms.

Thus, it is important to see the common features between paradigms, and study only the

differences. In order to see these points, in this book the order of |\hlqhbis is arranged as

follows:

• g-ending masculine |\hlqhbis

� g-ending na fQ\R |\hlqhbis in masculine (similar to the previous)

� Other na fQ\R |\hlqhbis in masculine (similar to the previous)

• g-ending neuter |\hlqhbis (similar to the g-ending masculine |\hlqhbis)

� g-ending na fQ\R |\hlqhbis in neuter (similar to the previous)

� Other na fQ\R |\hlqhbis in neuter (similar to the previous)

• �/�-ending masculine |\hlqhbis (similar to each other)

• �-ending masculine |\hlqhbis (following original pattern of n Mq-|�e)

• �-ending feminine |\hlqhbis

� � -ending na fQ\R |\hlqhbis in feminine (similar to the previous)

� Other na fQ\R |\hlqhbis in feminine (similar to the previous)

• �-ending feminine |\hlqhbis (similar to �-ending feminine |\hlqhbis)

• �/�-ending feminine |\hlqhbis (similar to �-ending feminine and �/�-ending

masculine)

• Other na fQ\R |\hlqhbis in all genders


89

1. g-ending in q M�h�� (masculine) – j\R [rāma]

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “j\R” (Rāma), gi\j\c-q M�h��-w{�

adQR ` (Number) ha^hp�(Case)

viadQR ` (Singular) h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) j\R� j\RÂ j\R\�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) j\RR ` j\RÂ j\R\Q `

lsl�e\ (3rd case) j\RZ� j\R\O\R ` j\R ��

dl M�� (4th case) j\R\e j\R\O\R ` j\R ZO�

qrR� (5th case) j\R\l/j\R\b j\R\O\R ` j\R ZO�

k�� (6th case) j\Rñ j\ReP� j\R\�\R `

n�R� (7th case) j\RZ j\ReP� j\R Zk M

n�P[QR ` (Vocative) zZ j\R zZ j\RÂ zZ j\R\�

� In 3/1 and 6/3, �ì takes place when applicable. (Refer �ì-nh�� (8.4.2) in

Volume 2.)

� In 7/3, R½[ fø-ì takes place. (Refer R½[ føì-nh�� (8.3.59) in Volume 2.)

Other gi\j-gc-q M�h�� (g-ending masculine) |\hlqhbis:

�d\e f – teacher

��j – īśvara

L M� – quality, gu=a

y\R – village

Ç� – pot

d§ – the Moon

}Q – people

}�a – individual

�\L – renunciation

bZa – deva

bZabt – name of a person

bZw – country

bZz – body

q M¾ – son

q MNk – person

|\� – prā=a

£\¤� – Brahmin

^ Zb – difference

^PL – experience

�Pi – sphere of experience

hake – object

as¦ – tree

a Zb – the Veda

hw_ – disciple

n�� – relationship

n½e f – the Sun

z³ – hand

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/3

3/3

4/3

5/3

6/3

7/3

S/3

2/2

3/2

4/2

5/2

6/2

7/2

S/2

3/1

2/1

4/1

5/1

6/1

7/1

S/1


90

Assignment on g-ending masculine

1st case (|�R\ ha^hp�)

� Observe the forms in the 1st case.

o In 1/1, hanL f is added at the end.

o In 1/2, the last letter g is replaced by Ô.

o In 1/3, the last letter g is elongated and hanL f is added at the end.

In this manner, make forms in the 1st case with all the gi\j\cq M�h��-|\hlqhbis in the list.

� Study the meanings of 1st case in Topic VIII - Meanings of Case Endings.


� Complete up to Topic IV - hanL fnh�� [visarga-sandhi7] section of Volume 2.

� Apply hanL fnh�� to all the sentences in Exercise #8 and #9.

2nd case (h�l�e\ ha^hp�)

� Complete Topic VI – Consonant Sandhi 7. gQ M²\j� of Volume 2.

� Observe the forms in the 2nd case.

o In 2/1, R ` is added at the end.

o 2/2 is always the same as 1/2 for any |\hlqhbi.

o In 2/3, the last letter g is elongated and Q ` is added at the end.

In this manner, make forms in the 2nd case with all the gi\j\cq M�h��-|\hlqhbis in the list.

� Study the meanings of 2nd case in Topic VIII - Meanings of Case Endings.


3rd case (lsl�e\ ha^hp�)

� Complete Topic VI – Consonant Sandhi 10. �ìR ` of Volume 2.

� Observe the forms in the 3rd case.

o In 3/1, “�Q” is suffixed with L M�-nh��. �ì can happen for the suffix.

o In 3/2, the last letter g is elongated before the suffix O\R `.

o In 3/3, the last letter g is changed into Ò and hanL f is added at the end.

In this manner, make forms in the 3rd case with all the gi\j\cq M�h��-|\hlqhbis in the list.

� Study the meanings of 3rd case in Topic VIII - Meanings of Case Endings.


91


4th case (dl M�� ha^hp�)

� Observe the forms in the 4th case.

o In 4/1, the last letter g is elongated and e is suffixed.


o In 4/3, the last letter g is replaced by v before the suffix O�.

In this manner, make forms in the 4th case with all the gi\j\cq M�h��-|\hlqhbis in the list.

� Study the meanings of 4th case in Topic VIII - Meanings of Case Endings.


5th case (qrR� ha^hp�)

� Complete Topic VI – Consonant Sandhi 4. }æìR ` of Volume 2.


o In 5/1, the last letter g is elongated and l ` or b is added.

o 5/2 and 5/3 are always the same as 4/2 and 4/3 for any |\hlqhbi.




6th case (k�� ha^hp�)


o In 6/1, ñ is suffixed.

o In 6/2, eP� is added at the end.

o In 6/3, the last letter g is elongated and Q\R ` is suffixed. �ì can happen for the

suffix.





92

7th case (n�R� ha^hp�)

� Complete Topic VI – Consonant Sandhi 9. R½[ føìR ` of Volume 2.


o In 7/1, the last letter g and the suffix � become v by L M�-nh�. (g + � = v)


o In 7/3, the last letter g is replaced by v and n M is suffixed, with R½[ føìR `.




� Make the declension chart for |\hlqhbis: �d\e f, b Za, q MNk, �Pi, hake, as¦, and aZb.

� Study Topic XI – Nouns in Apposition (nR\Q\h[ij�R ` [samānādhikara=am])

� Study the first portion of Topic XII – Indeclinables (gëR ` [avyayam])


93

2. g-ending Pronouns in q M�h�� (masculine) – naf [sarva]

Among na fQ\Rs, g-ending |\hlqhbis in masculine decline like j\R, except for 1/3, 4/1,

5/1, 6/3, and 7/1, which are printed in bold in the chart.

o In 1/3, � is suffixed with L M�nh�, resulting with v. It looks like the form in 7/1.

However, 7/1 in na fQ\R is different from j\R-w{. Thus there is no confusion.

o In 4/1, � � is suffixed.

o In 5/1, �\l ` is suffixed.

o In 6/3, the last letter g is replaced by v, and n\R ` is suffixed, instead of Q\R ` in j\R. n `

of n\R ` becomes R½[ fø. (Refer R½[ føì-nh�� (8.3.59) in Volume 2.)

o In 7/1, h�Q ` is suffixed.

When na f (all) is used in singular, it generally indicates the whole part of a thing,

while when na f (all) is used in plural, it generally indicates all the members. E.g., “na f� 1/1

as¦� 1/1” (the whole tree); “naù 1/3 as¦\� 1/3” (all the trees)

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “na f” (all), gi\j\c-na fQ\R-q M�h��-w{�

adQR ` ha^hp�


oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) naf� na% naù

h�l�e\ (2nd case) nafR ` na% na\ fQ `

lsl�e\ (3rd case) naù� na\ fO\R ` na ��

dl M�� (4th case) naf� � na\ fO\R ` naùO�

qrR� (5th case) naf�\l/naf�\b na\ fO\R ` naùO�

k�� (6th case) nafñ nafeP� naùk\R `

n�R� (7th case) nafh�Q ` na feP� naùk M

n�P[QR ` (Vocative) zZ na f zZ na% zZ naù

The rest declines like j\R.

1/3

6/3

4/1

5/1

7/1

S/3


94

Other gi\j-gc-nafQ\R (g-ending pronouns):

gø – another

gølj – one of the two

�lj – the other

�^ – both (only in dual)

vi – one, someone

qj – after, another

q½a f – before, east

ha� – all

² – oneself, one’s own

Assignment on g-ending pronoun (na fQ\R) in masculine

� Make declension charts for the gi\j\c-na fQ\R-|\hlqhbis listed above.



95

3. Other Pronouns in q M�h�� (masculine) – lb, eb, vlb, hiR `

na fQ\Rs lb (that), eb (that which), vlb (this), and hiR ` (kim) are used in the language

very often. The declensions of these words are very similar to g-ending pronouns, like na f,

because they decline just as g-ending |\hlqhbis: “l”, “e”, “vl”, and “i”, respectively. The

only exception is in 1/1 for lb and vlb.

na fQ\R-|\hlqhbi lb (that) represents a thing or person who is away from the speaker.

E.g., n� LhR_hl S (He will come.); l Z abhc S (They say.); lh�Q ` ^ha_\hR S (I will be there.), etc.

Declension of na fQ\R-|\hlqhbiR ` “lb” (that) in masculine

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) n� lÂ l Z

h�l�e\ (2nd case) lR ` lÂ l\Q `

lsl�e\ (3rd case) lZQ l\O\R ` l ��

dl M�� (4th case) l�� l\O\R ` l ZO�

qrR� (5th case) l�\l/l�\b l\O\R ` l ZO�

k�� (6th case) lñ leP� l Zk\R `

n�R� (7th case) lh�Q ` leP� l Zk M

The rest declines like na f. * There is no vocative.

� The |\hlqhbi is modified from lb to l, g-ending, and declines like na f.

� 1/1 is the only exception.

1/1


96

eb is a relative pronoun. The corresponding pronoun is lb.

A sentence which includes the relative pronoun eb is called a relative clause, 12

which is subordinate to a main clause, which includes lb. In those clauses, a thing or

person indicated by eb is the same thing indicated by lb, which means eb corresponds to

lb.

For example, in the sentence “e� 1/1 qæehl III/1 n� 1/1 }\Q\hl III/1 S“ (the one who sees,

he knows.), “e� 1/1 qæehl III/1” is a relative clause because it includes eb. “n� 1/1 }\Q\hl III/1” is

a main clause because it includes lb. Both eb and lb in these two clauses are indicating the

same person. Similarly, “e�\l ` 5/1 qsÛhn II/1 l�\l ` 5/1 ab\hR I/1” (Because you ask, therefore, I

speak.) The cases do not have to match. “e� 1/1 �qhbwhl III/1 l� � 4/1 QR� 0S” (The one who

teaches, salutations to him.)

More will be understood by doing Exercise #17.

Declension of na fQ\R-|\hlqhbiR ` “eb” (that which) in masculine

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) e� eÂ e Z

h�l�e\ (2nd case) eR ` eÂ e\Q `

lsl�e\ (3rd case) eZQ e\O\R ` e ��

dl M�� (4th case) e�� e\O\R ` e ZO�

qrR� (5th case) e�\l/e�\b e\O\R ` e ZO�

k�� (6th case) eñ eeP� e Zk\R `

n�R� (7th case) eh�Q ` eeP� e Zk M

The entire declension is like na f. * There is no vocative.

� The |\hlqhbi is modified from eb to e, g-ending, and declines like na f.

12 A clause is a unit of words in which one verb is seen, or implied. A clause is a part of a sentence

and not a sentence by itself. A clause is incorporated into a sentence by utilizing a relative pronoun.

E.g., I found what I was looking for. I choose that which is proper.


97

vlb (this) represents a thing or person who is in close proximity to the speaker. E.g.,

vk� 1/1 q MNk� 1/1 S (This person); vl Z 1/3 as¦\� 1/3 S (These trees), etc.

lb (that) and vlb (this) are often used together to show that which was discussed in

previous sentences is the same as this which is under discussion in the current sentence.

E.g., vi� 1/1 |hnu� 1/1 Qsq� 1/1 S n� 1/1 vk� 1/1 q MNk� 1/1 S (There is a famous king. He is this man.)

Declension of na fQ\R-|\hlqhbiR ` “vlb” (this) in masculine

adQR ` ha^hp�


oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) vk� vlÂ vl Z

h�l�e\ (2nd case) vlR ` vlÂ vl\Q `

lsl�e\ (3rd case) vlZQ vl\O\R ` vl ��

dl M�� (4th case) vl�� vl\O\R ` vl ZO�

qrR� (5th case) vl�\l/vl�\b vl\O\R ` vl ZO�

k�� (6th case) vlñ vleP� vl Zk\R `

n�R� (7th case) vlh�Q ` vleP� vl Zk M


� The |\hlqhbi is modified from vlb to vl, g-ending, and declines like na f.

� 1/1 is the only exception.

� “v” is added to the paradigm of lb, with R½[ føì (Ref. R½[ fø-nh�� (8.3.59) in Volume 2)

on vk� 1/1.

1/1


98

hiR ` (kim) is an interrogative pronoun.

E.g., i� 1/1 vk� 1/1 q MNk� 1/1 S (Who is this person?); iZ 1/3 l Z 1/3 S (Who are they?); iR ` 2/1

qæehn II/1S (What do you see?); i�\l ` 5/1S (Why?); iñ 6/1 q M¾� 1/1 n� 1/1S (Whose son is he?);

iZ k M 7/3 b Zw Zk M 7/3 áæel Z III/1 S (Where, in which places, is it seen?), etc.

Declension of na fQ\R-|\hlqhbiR ` “hiR” (what) in masculine

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) i� iÂ iZ

h�l�e\ (2nd case) iR ` iÂ i\Q `

lsl�e\ (3rd case) iZQ i\O\R ` i� �

dl M�� (4th case) i�� i\O\R ` iZO�

qrR� (5th case) i�\l/i�\b i\O\R ` iZO�

k�� (6th case) iñ ieP� iZ k\R `

n�R� (7th case) ih�Q ` ieP� iZ k M

It declines like na f. * There is no vocative.

� The |\hlqhbi is modified from hiR ` to i, g-ending, and declines like na f.

When eb and hiR `.are used together, it means “whatever”.

E.g., e Z 1/3 iZ 1/3 }Q\� 1/3 vlR ` 2/1 &PiR ` 2/1 qËhc III/3 ��j� 1/1 l\Q ` 2/3 j¦hl III/1 S (Whoever

people chant this verse, Īśvara protect them.)

Assignment on lb, eb, vlb, hiR ` in masculine


� Review hanL fnh�� section of Volume 2 for n� and vk�.


99

4. g-ending in Qq M�nih�� (neuter) – �\Q [j=āna]

g-ending neuter |\hlqhbis decline like j\R. The only difference is in the first two

cases, which are always identical for any neuter |\hlqhbis.

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “�\Q” (knowledge), gi\j\c-Qq M�nih��-w{�

The rest declines like j\R in q M�h��.

� In 1/3, 2/3, 3/1, and 6/3, �ì takes place when applicable. (Ref. Pā=ini-sūtra 8.4.2)

Other gi\j-gc-Qq M�nih�� (g-ending neuter) |\hlqhbis:

g – food

gjÙe – forest

�h§e – sense

iR� – lotus

ij� – instrument

i\j� – cause

i\e f – effect

¦ Z¾ – field

d �lø – consciousness

}� – water

l� – truth

ý�Æ – sorrow

[Q – wealth

QLj – town

Q Z¾ – eye

q¾ – leaf

q\¾ – vessel

q M³i – book

|ij� - section

Ð� - fruit, result

hR¾ – friend

aQ – forest

a� – cloth

a\» - sentence

a �j\�e – dispassion

wj�j – body

w\� – scripture

w�� – character

n\[Q – means

n MÆ – happiness

übe – heart

Assignment on g-ending neuter

� Make declension charts for the gi\j\c-Qq M�ni-|\hlqhbis listed above.


ha^hp� adQR ` viadQR ` h�adQR ` oèadQR `

|�R\ (1st case) �\QR ` �\Q Z �\Q\hQ

h�l�e\ (2nd case) �\QR ` �\Q Z �\Q\hQ

lsl�e\ (3rd case) �\Q ZQ �\Q\O\R ` �\Q ��

dl M�� (4th case) �\Q\e �\Q\O\R ` �\Q ZO�

qrR� (5th case) �\Q\l/�\Q\b �\Q\O\R ` �\Q ZO�

k�� (6th case) �\Qñ �\QeP� �\Q\Q\R `

n�R� (7th case) �\Q Z �\QeP� �\Q Zk M n�P[QR `

(Vocative) zZ �\Q zZ �\Q Z zZ �\Q\hQ

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/3 2/2 2/1

S/3 S/2 S/1


100

5. g-ending Pronouns in Qq M�nih�� (neuter) – naf [sarva]

Among na fQ\Rs, g-ending |\hlqhbis in neuter decline as hybrids of �\Q and na f in

masculine. The first two cases are like �\Q, while the rest are like na f in masculine.

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “na f” (all), gi\j\c-na fQ\R-Qq M�nih��-w{�

adQR ` ha^hp�


oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) nafR ` naù na\ fh�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) nafR ` naù na\ fh�

lsl�e\ (3rd case) naù� na\ fO\R ` na ��

dl M�� (4th case) naf� � na\ fO\R ` naùO�

qrR� (5th case) naf�\l/ naf�\b na\ fO\R ` naùO�

k�� (6th case) nafñ nafeP� naùk\R `

n�R� (7th case) nafh�Q ` na feP� naùk M

n�P[QR ` (Vocative) zZ na f zZ naù zZ na\ fh�

1st and 2nd case and vocative decline like �\Q.

The rest declines like na f in q M�h��.

Other gi\j-gc-nafQ\R (g-ending pronouns):

gø – another, other

gølj – one of the two

�lj – another

�^ – both (only in dual)

vi – one, someone

qj – after, another

q½a f – before, east

ha� – all

² – oneself, one’s own

* As for gø, gølj, and �lj, their forms in 1/1, 2/1, and S/1 are gøl `, gøljl `, and �ljl `,

respectively.

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/3 2/2 2/1

S/3 S/2 S/1


101

6. Other Pronouns in Qq M�nih�� (neuter) – lb, eb, vlb, hiR `

Declension of na fQ\R-|\hlqhbiR ` “lb” (that), in neuter

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) ll/lb l Z l\hQ

h�l�e\ (2nd case) ll/lb l Z l\hQ

lsl�e\ (3rd case) lZQ l\O\R ` l ��

dl M�� (4th case) l�� l\O\R ` l ZO�

qrR� (5th case) l�\l/ l�\b l\O\R ` l ZO�

k�� (6th case) lñ leP� l Zk\R `

n�R� (7th case) lh�Q ` leP� l Zk M


� lb declines as “l”, g-ending na fQ\R, except for 1/1 and 2/1.

Declension of na fQ\R-|\hlqhbiR ` “eb” (that which), in neuter

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) el/eb e Z e\hQ

h�l�e\ (2nd case) el/eb e Z e\hQ

lsl�e\ (3rd case) eZQ e\O\R ` e ��

dl M�� (4th case) e�� e\O\R ` e ZO�

qrR� (5th case) e�\l/e�\b e\O\R ` e ZO�

k�� (6th case) eñ eeP� e Zk\R `

n�R� (7th case) eh�Q ` eeP� e Zk M


� eb declines as “e”, g-ending na fQ\R, except for 1/1 and 2/1.

1/1

2/1

1/1

2/1


102

Declension of na fQ\R-|\hlqhbiR ` “vlb” (this), in neuter


|�R\ (1st case) vll/vlb vl Z vl\hQ

h�l�e\ (2nd case) vll/vlb vl Z vl\hQ

lsl�e\ (3rd case) vlZQ vl\O\R ` vl ��

dl M�� (4th case) vl�� vl\O\R ` vl ZO�

qrR� (5th case) vl�\l/ vl�\b vl\O\R ` vl ZO�

k�� (6th case) vlñ vleP� vl Zk\R `

n�R� (7th case) vlh�Q ` vleP� vl Zk M


� vlb declines as “vl”, g-ending na fQ\R, except for 1/1 and 2/1.

Declension of na fQ\R-|\hlqhbiR ` “hiR” (what) in neuter


|�R\ (1st case) hiR ` iZ i\hQ

h�l�e\ (2nd case) hiR ` iZ i\hQ

lsl�e\ (3rd case) iZQ i\O\R ` i� �

dl M�� (4th case) i�� i\O\R ` iZO�

qrR� (5th case) i�\l/ i�\b i\O\R ` iZO�

k�� (6th case) iñ ieP� iZ k\R `

n�R� (7th case) ih�Q ` ieP� iZ k M


� hiR ` declines as “i”, g-ending na fQ\R, except for 1/1 and 2/1.

Assignment on pronoun (na fQ\R) in neuter and gës

� Do Exercises #20 to #23 in the last part of this book.

1/1

2/1

1/1

2/1


103

7. �/�-ending in q M�h�� (masculine) – zhj [hari]/L MN [guru]

�-ending and �-ending |\hlqhbis have similarities which make them decline in the

same manner. These similarities are discussed on the next page.

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “zhj” (Vi:=u), �i\j\c-q M�h��-w{�

Other �i\j-gc-q M�h�� (�-ending masculine) |\hlqhbis:

gh� – fire

ghlh� – guest

ghj – enemy

ghn – sword

�hb – beginning

�bh[ – ocean

�q\h[ – upādhi

�hk – sage

ihq – monkey

iha – poet

L�qhl – Ga=apati

hLhj – mountain

yh' – knot

Qsqhl – king

q\h� – hand

Rh� – jewel

R MhQ - sage

ehl – ascetic

ah – fire

¨\h[ – disease

hah[ – injunction

jha – the sun

n\jh� – charioteer

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) zhj� zj� zje�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) zhjR ` zj� zj�Q `

lsl�e\ (3rd case) zhj�\ zhjO\R ` zhjh^�

dl M�� (4th case) zje Z zhjO\R ` zhjO�

qrR� (5th case) zjZ� zhjO\R ` zhjO�

k�� (6th case) zjZ� ze(� zj��\R `

n�R� (7th case) zjÂ ze(� zhjk M

n�P[QR ` (Vocative) zZ zjZ zZ zj� zZ zje�

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/1 2/2 2/3

3/1 3/2 3/3

4/1 4/2 4/3

5/1 5/2 5/3

6/1 6/2 6/3

7/1 7/2 7/3

S/1 S/2 S/3

Topic VIII – Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

104

Observe how the letter � at the end of an �-ending |\hlqhbi is modified in the declension.

• � remains as it is in [hari7] 1/1, [harim] 2/1, [hari=ā] 3/1, [haribhyām] 3/2, 4/2, 5/2,

[haribhi7] 3/3, [haribhya7] 4/3, 5/3, and [hari:u] 7/3.

• � is modified into b�Ç f in [harī] 1/2, 2/2, S/2, [harīn] 2/3, and [harī=ām] 6/3.

• � is modified into ge ` in [haraya7] 1/3, S/3 and [haraye] 4/1.

• � is modified into L M� in [hare7] 5/1, 6/1 and [hare] S/1.

• � is modified into e� ` in [haryo7] 6/2, 7/2.

• � is modified into Ô in [harau] 7/1.

The letter � at the end of an �-ending |\hlqhbi will be modified in the declension in

exactly the same manner as � at the end of �-ending |\hlqhbi.

• � remains as it is in [guru7] 1/1, [gurum] 2/1, [guru=ā] 3/1, [gurubhyām] 3/2, 4/2, 5/2,

[gurubhi7] 3/3, [gurubhya7] 4/3, 5/3, and [guru:u] 7/3.

• � is modified into b�Ç f in [gurū] 1/2, 2/2, S/2, [gurūn] 2/3, and [gurū=ām] 6/3.

• � is modified into ge ` in [gurava7] 1/3, S/3 and [gurave] 4/1.

• � is modified into L M� in [guro7] 5/1, 6/1 and [guro] S/1.

• � is modified into e� ` in [gurvo7] 6/2, 7/2.

• � is modified into Ô in [gurau] 7/1.

The following chart may help in seeing the correspondence in modifications:

Modifications of �/� of �/�-ending |\hlqhbis


|�R\ (1st case) b�Ç f� (�/Ñ) ge/ga `

h�l�e\ (2nd case) b�Ç f� (�/Ñ) b�Ç f� (�/Ñ)

lsl�e\ (3rd case)

dl M�� (4th case) ge/ga `

qrR� (5th case) L M�� (v/Ó)

k�� (6th case) L M�� (v/Ó) e� ` (e/a) b�Ç f� (�/Ñ)

n�R� (7th case) Ô e� ` (e/a)

n�P[QR ` (Vocative) L M�� (v/Ó) b�Ç f� (�/Ñ) ge/ga `

Try to make the declension chart for L MN, an �-ending |\hlqhbi in masculine.


105

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “L MN” (teacher), �i\j\c-q M�h��-w{�

The declension is identical to zhj.


�) – the Moon

�k M – arrow

�l M – season

lN – tree

[\l M – root

qw M – animal

o� M – friend

o\è – arm

ho) – drop

Rz\o\è – Arjuna

R MR M¦ M – mumuk:u

Rs� M – death

a\e M – wind

ha« M – Vi:=u

hww M – infant

n\[ M – sādhu

hn� M – sea

n Zl M – bridge

î\� M – pillar

zZl M – cause

Assignment on �/�-ending masculine

� Make declension charts for the �i\j\c and �i\j\c-q M¢h*�-|\hlqhbis listed above.


adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) L MN� L M L Mja�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) L MNR ` L M L M Q `

lsl�e\ (3rd case) L MN�\ L MNO\R ` L MNh^�

dl M�� (4th case) L MjaZ L MNO\R ` L MNO�

qrR� (5th case) L MjP� L MNO\R ` L MNO�

k�� (6th case) L MjP� L Ma(� L M �\R `

n�R� (7th case) L MjÂ L Ma(� L MNk M

n�P[QR ` (Vocative) zZ L MjP zZ L M zZ L Mja�

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/1 2/2 2/3

3/1 3/2 3/3

4/1 4/2 4/3

5/1 5/2 5/3

6/1 6/2 6/3

7/1 7/2 7/3

S/1 S/2 S/3


106

8. �-ending in q M�h�� (masculine) – ils f [kart6]

|\hlqhbi ils f is derived from is [\l M with the suffix ls which denotes the agent of the

action. All the words derived by addition of the suffix ls decline in the same manner as

discussed here. The basic declension is like zhj. The difference is in bold in the chart.

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “ils f” (doer), �i\j\c-q M�h��-w{�

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) il\ f il\ fjÂ il\ fj�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) il\ fjR ` il\ fjÂ ilú fQ `

lsl�e\ (3rd case) i¾\ f ils fO\R ` ils fh^�

dl M�� (4th case) i¾ù ils fO\R ` ils fO�

qrR� (5th case) il Mf� ils fO\R ` ils fO�

k�� (6th case) il Mf� i¾(� ilú f�\R `

n�R� (7th case) ilfhj i¾(� ils fk M

n�P[QR ` (Vocative) zZ il f� zZ il\ fjÂ zZ il\ fj�


g®Zls– student

Lcs – goer

�\ls – knower

b\ls – giver

+ós – seer

[\ls – supporter

|ós – questioner

^Pps – experiencer

�Pls – listener

,ós – creator

zcs – injurer

zPls – priest

Assignment on �-ending masculine

� Make declension charts for the �i\j-gc-q M¢h*�-|\hlqhbis listed above.

� Do Exercise #26.

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/3

3/3

4/3

5/3

6/3

7/3

S/3

2/2

3/2

4/2

5/2

6/2

7/2

S/2

3/1

2/1

4/1

5/1

6/1

7/1

S/1


107

Now we can take a closer look at the declension process. Declension is done by

suffixing nominal suffix (n Mq-|�e [sup-pratyaya]) to nominal base (|\hlqhbi [prātipadika]).

The n Mq-|�es were originally taught by Pā=ini with indicatory letters, or �l ` [it] in

grammatical terminology. Before being used, the �l ` letters are removed from the n Mq-|�es,

as seen in the next chart.

n Mq-|�es (nominal suffixes) without �l ` (indicatory) letters


1st case n ` [s] Ô [au] gn ` [as]

2nd case gR ` [am] Ô [au] gn ` [as]

3rd case � [ā] O\R ` [bhyām] h^n ` [bhis]

4th case v [e] O\R ` [bhyām] On ` [bhyas]

5th case gn ` [as] O\R ` [bhyām] On ` [bhyas]

6th case gn ` [as] Ón ` [os] �R ` [ām]

7th case � [i] Ón ` [os] n M [su]

Pā=ini observed three different patterns of declension in three different sections in

the declensional chart. These three sections are named as shown below for the sake of

explaining the ways of declension in an efficient manner.

Three sections in masculine and feminine



2nd case gR ` [am] Ô [au]

3rd case

4th case

5th case

6th case

7th case

The |�e in this section of the chart is termed na fQ\Rî\Q [sarvanāmasthāna].

The g� in this section of the chart is termed ^ [bha].

The g� in this section of the chart is termed qb [pada].


108

By suffixing the n Mq-|�es, the |\hlqhbi is termed g�. The last letter of g� is modified

in a certain manner in each section. Then the g� and the n Mq-|�e are combined. Sandhi

(phonetic change when two sounds meet) may take place if applicable.

Modifications of � of �-ending g�


|�R\ (1st case) �

[kartā] �j

[kartārau] �j

[kartāra7]

h�l�e\ (2nd case) �j

[kartāram] �j

[kartārau] b�Ç f� (Î)

[kartûn]

lsl�e\ (3rd case) e� ` (j)

[kartrā] [kart6bhyām]

[kart6bhi7]

dl M�� (4th case) e� ` (j)

[kartre] [kart6bhyām]

[kart6bhya7]

qrR� (5th case) �

[kartu7] [kart6bhyām]

[kart6bhya7]

k�� (6th case) �

[kartu7] e� ` (j)

[kartro7] b�Ç f� (Î)

[kartû=ām]

n�R� (7th case) L M�� (g+j)

[kartari] e� ` (j)

[kartro7] [kart6:u]

n�P[QR ` (Vocative)

g� [karta7]

�j [kartārau]

�j [kartāra7]

In na fQ\Rî\Q section, � becomes �, �j, or g�

In 5/1, 6/1 and 7/1, special change takes place.

In 2/3 and 6/3, declension is like j\R and zhj.

For the rest, e�-nh� takes place between � and the beginning letter of

the suffixes.

In qb section, |\hlqhbi remains the same.


109

9. �-ending in ��h�� (feminine) – L�\ [ga�gā]

There is no g-ending feminine |\hlqhbi. �-ending |\hlqhbi is the basis for declension

of vowel-ending feminine |\hlqhbi. The ending letter � of �i\j\c-��h��-|\hlqhbi in this

section is from a feminine suffix �.

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “L�\” (ga�gā), �i\j\c-��h��-w{�

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) L�\ L�Z L�\�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) L�\R ` L�Z L�\�

lsl�e\ (3rd case) L�e\ L�\O\R ` L�\h^�

dl M�� (4th case) L�\e � L�\O\R ` L�\O�

qrR� (5th case) L�\e\� L�\O\R ` L�\O�

k�� (6th case) L�\e\� L�eP� L�\Q\R `

n�R� (7th case) L�\e\R ` L�eP� L�\n M

n�P[QR ` (Vocative) zZ L�Z zZ L�Z zZ L�\�

� In qb section, n Mq-|�es are simply added to |\hlqhbi.

Other �i\j-gc-��h�� (�-ending feminine) |\hlqhbis:

gaî\– state

��\ – name

��\hei\ – story

�Û\ – desire

�qR\ – example

i�\ – story

is q\ – mercy

h�e\ – action

L Mz\ - cave

hdc\ – worry

h}�\n\ – desire to know

h}ë\ – tongue

hlhl¦\ – endurance

be\ – compassion

bw\ – state

bZal\ – presiding deity

hQ+\ – sleep

hQ�\ – firmness

R\�\ – garland

�u\ – faith

w�\ – doubt

n��\ – name

n ZQ\ – army

n Za\ - service

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/1 2/2 2/3

3/1 3/2 3/3

4/1 4/2 4/3

5/1 5/2 5/3

6/1 6/2 6/3

7/1 7/2 7/3

S/1 S/2 S/3


110

Assignment on �-ending feminine

� Observe the declension. Note that n Mq-|�e s which are hmls (suffix with m), i.e., 4/1,

5/1, 6/1, and 7/1 are modified specially for �-ending feminine |\hlqhbi.

1st case (|�R\ ha^hp�)

o 1/1 looks identical to |\hlqhbi.

o In 1/2, the last letter � is replaced by v.

o In 1/3, hanL f is added at the end.

2nd case (h�l�e\ ha^hp�)

o In 2/1, R ` is added at the end.


o In 2/3, hanL f, instead of Q `, is added at the end. This is special to feminine words.

3rd case (lsl�e\ ha^hp�)

o In 3/1, the last letter � is shortened and e\ is added.

o In 3/2 and 3/3, O\R ` and h^� are suffixed respectively.

4th case (dl M�� ha^hp�)

o In 4/1, e � (special to �-ending feminine) is suffixed.


o In 4/3, O� is suffixed

5th case (qrR� ha^hp�)

o In 5/1, e\� (special to �-ending feminine) is suffixed.

o 5/2 and 5/3 are always the same as 4/2 and 4/3 for any |\hlqhbi.

6th case (k�� ha^hp�)

o In 6/1, e\� (special to �-ending feminine) is suffixed.

o In 6/2, the last letter � is shortened and eP� is added at the end

o In 6/3, Q\R ` is suffixed. �ì can happen for the suffix.

7th case (n�R� ha^hp�)

o In 7/1, e\R ` (special to �-ending feminine) is suffixed with L M�-nh�.


o In 7/3, n M is suffixed.

� Make the declension chart for |\hlqhbis: gaî\, �Û\, h�e\, L Mz\, h}�\n\, and bZal\.



111

10. �-ending Pronouns in ��h�� (feminine) – na\ f [sarvā]

When pointing to a feminine word, g-ending na fQ\R takes a feminine suffix � and

becomes �-ending feminine |\hlqhbi. The declension is similar to L�\ with exceptions

listed below.

o When hmls (suffixes with m, i.e., 4/1, 5/1, 6/1, and 7/1) follow, the last letter of

g�, �, is shortened and suffixes are modified into ñ �, ñ\�, ñ\�, ñ\R `, respectively.

o In 6/3, n\R ` is suffixed, instead of Q\R ` in L�\.

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “na\ f” (all), �i\j\c-na fQ\R-��h��-w{�

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) na\ f naù na\ f�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) na\ fR ` naù na\ f�

lsl�e\ (3rd case) nafe\ na\ fO\R ` na\ fh^�

dl M�� (4th case) nafñ � na\ fO\R ` na\ fO�

qrR� (5th case) nafñ\� na\ fO\R ` na\ fO�

k�� (6th case) nafñ\� nafeP� na\ fn\R `

n�R� (7th case) nafñ\R ` na feP� na\ fn M

|�R\ (1st case) zZ naù zZ naù zZ na\ f�

The rest declines like L�\.

Other �i\j-gc-nafQ\R (�-ending pronouns):

gø\ – another

gølj\ – one of the two

�lj\ – another

�^\ – both (only in dual)

vi\ – one, someone

qj\ – after, another

q½a\ f – before, east

ha�\ – all

²\ – oneself, one’s own

Assignment on �-ending pronoun (na fQ\R) in feminine

� Make the declension chart for the |\hlqhbis in the list above.


4/1

5/1

6/1 6/3

7/1


112

11. Other Pronouns in ��h�� (feminine) – lb, eb, vlb, hiR `

When pointing to a feminine word, lb, eb, vlb, and hiR ` become l\, e\, vl\, and i\

respectively with a feminine suffix � and decline like �-ending na fQ\R.

Declension of na fQ\R-|\hlqhbiR ` “lb” (that), in feminine


|�R\ (1st case) n\ l Z l\�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) l\R ` l Z l\�

lsl�e\ (3rd case) le\ l\O\R ` l\h^�

dl M�� (4th case) lñ� l\O\R ` l\O�

qrR� (5th case) lñ\� l\O\R ` l\O�

k�� (6th case) lñ\� leP� l\n\R `

n�R� (7th case) lñ\R ` leP� l\n M

The rest declines like na\ f. * There is no vocative.

Declension of na fQ\R-|\hlqhbiR ` “eb” (that which), in feminine


|�R\ (1st case) e\ e Z e\�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) e\R ` e Z e\�

lsl�e\ (3rd case) ee\ e\O\R ` e\h^�

dl M�� (4th case) eñ� e\O\R ` e\O�

qrR� (5th case) eñ\� e\O\R ` e\O�

k�� (6th case) eñ\� eeP� e\n\R `

n�R� (7th case) eñ\R ` eeP� e\n M

It declines like na\ f. * There is no vocative.

1/1


113

Declension of na fQ\R-|\hlqhbiR ` “vlb” (this), in feminine


|�R\ (1st case) vk\ vl Z vl\�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) vl\R ` vl Z vl\�

lsl�e\ (3rd case) vle\ vl\O\R ` vl\h^�

dl M�� (4th case) vlñ� vl\O\R ` vl\O�

qrR� (5th case) vlñ\� vl\O\R ` vl\O�

k�� (6th case) vlñ\� vleP� vl\n\R `

n�R� (7th case) vlñ\R ` vleP� vl\n M

The rest declines like na\ f. * There is no vocative.

Declension of na fQ\R-|\hlqhbiR ` “hiR” (what), in feminine


|�R\ (1st case) i\ iZ i\�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) i\R ` iZ i\�

lsl�e\ (3rd case) ie\ i\O\R ` i\h^�

dl M�� (4th case) iñ� i\O\R ` i\O�

qrR� (5th case) iñ\� i\O\R ` i\O�

k�� (6th case) iñ\� ieP� i\n\R `

n�R� (7th case) iñ\R ` ieP� i\n M

It declines like na\ f. * There is no vocative.

Assignment on lb, eb, vlb, hiR ` in feminine


1/1


114

12. �-ending in ��h�� (feminine) – Qb� [nadī]

The ending letter � of �i\j\c-��h��-|\hlqhbi in this section is from a feminine suffix

�. Some of the derived |\hlqhbis, such as ils f, ePhLQ `, ^Lal `, nl `, take this feminine suffix � and

become �-ending feminine |\hlqhbi.

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “Qb�” (river), �i\j\c-��h��-w{�

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) Qb� QxÂ Qx�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) Qb�R ` QxÂ Qb��

lsl�e\ (3rd case) Qx\ Qb�O\R ` Qb�h^�

dl M�� (4th case) Qx � Qb�O\R ` Qb�O�

qrR� (5th case) Qx\� Qb�O\R ` Qb�O�

k�� (6th case) Qx\� QxP� Qb�Q\R `

n�R� (7th case) Qx\R ` QxP� Qb�k M

n�P[QR ` (Vocative) zZ Qhb zZ QxÂ zZ Qx�

� In qb section, n Mq-|�es are simply added to |\hlqhbi.

� In 7/3, R½[ føì takes place. (Refer R½[ føì-nh�� (8.3.59) in Volume 2.)


�a�– earth

i\�� – Kālī

i\w� – Vārā=asī

L\e¾� – Gāyatrī

LÂj� – Gaurī

}QQ� – mother

h�.�� – footnote

bZa� – goddess

QLj� - city

q�� – wife

q\a fl� – Pārvatī

qsh�a� – earth

Rz� – earth

a\�� – speech

a\q� – pond

a\j\�n� - Vārā=asī

= Derived words =

i¾� – feminine form of ils f

ePhLQ� – feminine form of ePhLQ `

^Lal� – feminine form of ^Lal `

nl� – feminine form of nl `

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/1 2/2 2/3

3/1 3/2 3/3

4/1 4/2 4/3

5/1 5/2 5/3

6/1 6/2 6/3

7/1 7/2 7/3

S/1 S/2 S/3


115

Except for S/1, for all the forms in the declension of �-ending feminine, the last

letter � of the |\hlqhbi either remains in the same form, or changes into e `, as a result of e�-

nh� with vowel-beginning suffixes, as seen in the following chart. 13

The underlined n Mq-|�es are special for �-ending feminine |\hlqhbis.

Modifications of � of �-ending |\hlqhbi with n Mq-|�es


|�R\ (1st case) + elided e� ` (e) + Ô e� ` (e) + gn `

h�l�e\ (2nd case) + R ` e� ` (e) + Ô + :

lsl�e\ (3rd case) e� ` (e) + � + O\R ` + h^�

dl M�� (4th case) e� ` (e) + Ò + O\R ` + O�

qrR� (5th case) e� ` (e) + �� + O\R ` + O�

k�� (6th case) e� ` (e) + �� e� ` (e) + Ón ` + Q\R `

n�R� (7th case) e� ` (e) + �R ` e� ` (e) + Ón ` + n M

n�P[QR ` (Vocative) ×²� (�) + elided e� ` (e) + Ô e� ` (e) + gn `

Assignment on �-ending in feminine

� Make the declension chart for |\hlqhbis bZa�, qsh�a�, and ^Lal�


13 Note that there are some exceptions.

1) �Ü� (Goddess Lak:mī) in 1/1 is �Ü��, with hanL f. It declines like Qb� for the rest.

2) �� (Goddess Lak:mī), [� (intellect), ×� (humility), ^� (fear) in 1/1 are also with hanL f. The last

letter � is changed into �e ` when suffix beginning with vowel follows.

3) �� (female) in 1/1 is ��, without hanL f. The last letter � is changed into �e ` when suffix beginning

with vowel follows, but the change is optional in 2/1 and 2/3.


116

13. �-ending in ��h�� (feminine) – Rhl [mati]

The declension of short �-ending feminine |\hlqhbis is a mixture of short �-ending

masculine like zhj and long �-ending feminine like Qb�.

The entire declension is like zhj, except for 2/3 and 3/1, which are like Qb�.

With n Mq-|�e which is hml ` (suffix with m. i.e., 4/1, 5/1, 6/1, and 7/1), there are two

forms: one is like zhj and the other is like Qb�.

Many of the �-ending feminine |\hlqhbis are derived from [\l M with suffix hl, which

makes feminine |\hlqhbi.

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “Rhl” (intellect), �i\j\c-��h��-w{�

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) Rhl� Rl� Rle�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) RhlR ` Rl� Rl��

lsl�e\ (3rd case) R�\ RhlO\R ` Rhlh^�

dl M�� (4th case) R� �/RleZ RhlO\R ` RhlO�

qrR� (5th case) R�\�/RlZ� RhlO\R ` RhlO�

k�� (6th case) R�\�/RlZ� R�P� Rl�Q\R `

n�R� (7th case) R�\R/RlÂ R�P� Rhlk M

n�P[QR ` (Vocative) zZ Rl Z zZ Rl� zZ Rle�

� Forms in black are like Qb� (�-ending feminine). The rest are like zhj (�-ending masculine).


gQ Mqqht – untenability

�hp – statement

�qqht – tenability

Lhl – way

hlh� – lunar day

áhó – view

|is hl – nature, origin

|\h� – gain

o Mhu – intellect

^�hl – fear

^½hR – earth

R Mhp – freedom

e Mhp – reasoning

e Mahl – girl

Nhd – light

whp – power

w\hc – peace

� Mhl – śruti

nshó – creation

�shl – sm6ti

2/3

3/1

4/1

5/1

6/1

7/1


117

Assignment on �-ending in feminine

� Make the declension chart for |\hlqhbis gQ Mqqht, �hp, Lhl, |\h�, � Mhl, and �shl.

� Do Exercises #31and #32 in the last part of this book.

�-ending feminine |\hlqhbi and Ñ-ending feminine |\hlqhbi are omitted in this book

because they are rarely seen. However, their declensions are easily made by following the

principle of the correspondence of � and �. Refer back to 7. �/�-ending in q M�h�� (masculine).


118

14. Pronoun – �bR ` [idam]

�bR ` (this) is a na fQ\R |\hlqhbi. It indicates an object which is close to the speaker. vlb

(this) is closer proximity to �bR ` (this). �bR ` (this) declines in all three h��s (genders), agreeing with the h�� of the word it

qualifies.

In masculine, �bR ` declines as “g” in na fQ\R, except as indicated below in black.

Declension of na fQ\R-|\hlqhbiR ` “�bR” (this) in masculine


In neuter, �bR ` declines like in masculine, except for the first two cases shown below.

Declension of na fQ\R-|\hlqhbiR ` “�bR” (this) in neuter

The rest declines like �bR ` in q M�h��. * There is no vocative.

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) geR ` �RÂ �RZ

h�l�e\ (2nd case) �RR ` �RÂ �R\Q `

lsl�e\ (3rd case) gQ ZQ �O\R ` vh^�

dl M�� (4th case) g�� O\R ` vO�

qrR� (5th case) g�\l/g�\b �O\R ` vO�

k�� (6th case) gñ gQeP� vk\R `

n�R� (7th case) gh�Q ` gQeP� vk M

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) �bR ` �RZ �R\hQ

h�l�e\ (2nd case) �bR ` �RZ �R\hQ

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/1 2/2 2/3

3/1 3/3

6/2

7/2

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/1 2/2 2/3


119

In feminine, �bR ` declines as “�” in na fQ\R, except as indicated below in black.

Declension of na fQ\R-|\hlqhbiR ` “�bR” (this) in feminine

The rest declines like na\ f.

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) �eR ` �RZ �R\�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) �R\R ` �RZ �R\�

lsl�e\ (3rd case) gQe\ �O\R ` �h^�

dl M�� (4th case) gñ� �O\R ` �O�

qrR� (5th case) gñ\� �O\R ` �O�

k�� (6th case) gñ\� gQeP� �n\R `

n�R� (7th case) gñ\R ` gQeP� �n M

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/1 2/2 2/3

3/1

6/2

7/2


120

15. Pronoun – gbn ` [adas]

gbn ` (this) indicates an object which is away from the speaker, but is still seen by the

speaker, unlike lb (that) which is away and not seen.

gbn ` (that), na fQ\R |\hlqhbi, declines in three h��s (genders), agreeing with the h�� of

the word it qualifies.

Declension of na fQ\R-|\hlqhbiR ` “gbn” (that) in masculine

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) gnÂ gR½ gR�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) gR MR ` gR½ gR½Q `

lsl�e\ (3rd case) gR MQ\ gR½O\R ` gR�h^�

dl M�� (4th case) gR M � gR½O\R ` gR�O�

qrR� (5th case) gR M \l/gR M \b gR½O\R ` gR�O�

k�� (6th case) gR M_ gR MeP� gR�k\R `

n�R� (7th case) gR Mh Q ` gR MeP� gR�k M

Declension of na fQ\R-|\hlqhbiR ` “gbn” (that) in neuter

The rest declines like gbn ` in q M�h��. * There is no vocative.

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) gb� gR½ gR½hQ

h�l�e\ (2nd case) gb� gR½ gR½hQ

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/1 2/2 2/3

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/1 2/2 2/3

3/1 3/2 3/3

4/1 4/2 4/3

5/1 5/2 5/3

6/1 6/2 6/3

7/1 7/2 7/3


121

Declension of na fQ\R-|\hlqhbiR ` “gbn” (that) in feminine

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) gnÂ gR½ gR½�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) gR½R ` gR½ gR½�

lsl�e\ (3rd case) gR Me\ gR½O\R ` gR½h^�

dl M�� (4th case) gR M_ � gR½O\R ` gR½O�

qrR� (5th case) gR M_\� gR½O\R ` gR½O�

k�� (6th case) gR M_\� gR MeP� gR½k\R `

n�R� (7th case) gR M_\R ` gR MeP� gR½k M

Note: Among pronouns vlb, �bR `, gbn `, and lb, the following order is generally used

based on the increasing distance from the speaker, vlb being the closest to the speaker,

and lb the farthest:

vlb (this) < �bR ` (this) < gbn ` (that) < lb (that)

Assignment on �bR ` and gbn `


1/1 1/2 1/3

2/1 2/2 2/3

3/1 3/2 3/3

4/1 4/2 4/3

5/1 5/2 5/3

6/1 6/2 6/3

7/1 7/2 7/3


122

16. Pronouns – e M b [yu:mad], g�b [asmad]

� e M b (you) and g�b (I, we) are na fQ\R-|\hlqhbis. They respectively indicate the listener

and speaker.

� e M b (you) and g�b (I, we) have the same forms in all 3 h��s.

E.g., ìR ` m/1/1 b Zabt� m/1/1 S ìR ` f/1/1 q\a fl� f/1/1 S ìR ` n/1/1 hR¾R ` n/1/1 S

E.g., gzR ` m/1/1 b Zabt� m/1/1 S gzR ` f/1/1 q\a fl� f/1/1 S gzR ` n/1/1 hR¾R ` n/1/1 S

� In 2nd, 4th, and 6th case, there are optional forms.

E.g., ��j� 1/1 ì\R/ì\ 2/1 j¦l M III/1 S (May the Lord protect you.)

E.g., ��j� 1/1 R\R/R\ 2/1 j¦l M III/1 S (May the Lord protect me.)

E.g., ��j� 1/1 e Ma\R/a\R ` 2/2 j¦l M III/1S (May the Lord protect us two.)

E.g., ��j� 1/1 �a\R/QÂ 2/2 j¦l M III/1S (May the Lord protect us two.)

E.g., ��j� 1/1 e M \Q/a� 2/3 j¦l M III/1S (May the Lord protect you all.)

E.g., ��j� 1/1 g�\Q/Q� 2/3 j¦l M III/1S (May the Lord protect us two.)

E.g., QR� 0 l MOR/l Z 4/1 QR� 0 S (Salutations to you)

E.g., RôR/RZ 4/1 ²h³ 0S (May auspiciousness be on me.)

E.g., QR� 0 e Ma\O\R/a\R ` 4/2 QR� 0 S (Salutations to you two)

E.g., �a\O\R/QÂ 4/2 ²h³ 0S (May auspiciousness be on us two

E.g., QR� 0 e M OR/a� 4/3 QR� 0 S (Salutations to you all)

E.g., g�OR/Q� 4/3 ²h³ 0S (May auspiciousness be on us all.)

E.g., la/lZ 6/1 hnhu� 1/1S (your succuss)

E.g., RR/RZ 6/1 hnhu� 1/1S (my succuss)

E.g., e MaeP�/a\R ` 6/2 LszR ` 1/1S (the house of you two)

E.g., �aeP�/QÂ 6/2 LszR ` 1/1S (the house of us two)

E.g., e M \iR/a� 6/3 �d\e f� 1/1S (the teacher of you all)

E.g., g�\iR/Q� 6/3 �d\e f� 1/1S (our teacher)


123

Declension of na fQ\R-|\hlqhbiR ` “e M b” (you, the listener) in all genders


|�R\ (1st case) ìR ` e Ma\R ` e½eR `

h�l�e\ (2nd case) ì\R/ì\ e Ma\R/a\R ` e M \Q/a�

lsl�e\ (3rd case) ìe\ e Ma\O\R ` e M \h^�

dl M�� (4th case) l MOR/l Z e Ma\O\R/a\R ` e M OR/a�

qrR� (5th case) ìl ` e Ma\O\R ` e M l `

k�� (6th case) la/lZ e MaeP�/a\R ` e M \iR/a�

n�R� (7th case) ìhe e MaeP� e M \n M

Declension of na fQ\R-|\hlqhbiR ` “g�b” (I, we, the speaker) in all genders


|�R\ (1st case) gzR ` �a\R ` aeR `

h�l�e\ (2nd case) R\R/R\ �a\R/QÂ g�\Q/Q�

lsl�e\ (3rd case) Re\ �a\O\R ` g�\h^�

dl M�� (4th case) RôR/RZ �a\O\R/QÂ g�OR/Q�

qrR� (5th case) Rl ` �a\O\R ` g�l `

k�� (6th case) RR/RZ �aeP�/QÂ g�\iR/Q�

n�R� (7th case) Rhe �aeP� g�\n M

* There is no vocative.

Assignment on e M b and g�b


1/1 1/2 1/3

2/1 2/2 2/3

3/1 3/2 3/3

4/1 4/2 4/3

5/1 5/2 5/3

6/1 6/2 6/3

7/1 7/2 7/3

2/1

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/1 2/2 2/3

3/1 3/2 3/3

4/1 4/2 4/3

5/1 5/2 5/3

6/1 6/2 6/3

7/1 7/2 7/3

2/1

4/1


124

17. Referring to the same object again (g¡\bZw� [anvādeśa7]) with �bR/vlb When one object is mentioned for conveying something, then, again the same object

is mentioned for conveying something else, that mentioning of the same object for the

second time is called g¡\bZw [anvādeśa7] in grammatical terminology.

When �bR ` (this)/vlb (this) are used in g¡\bZw [anvādeśa7], they assume different

forms in the 2nd case (2/1, 2/2, and 2/3), 3/1, 6/2, and 7/2. In these cases, the |\hlqhbi is

replaced by “vQ” in all three genders. Note that they are not optional forms of �bR/vlb. g¡\bZw� (referring again) of “�bR” (this) and “vlb” (this) in masculine

viadQR ` h�adQR ` oèadQR `

|�R\ (1st case)

h�l�e\ (2nd case) vQR ` vQÂ vQ\Q `

lsl�e\ (3rd case) vQ ZQ

dl M�� (4th case)

qrR� (5th case)

k�� (6th case) vQeP�

n�R� (7th case) vQeP�

The rest declines as usual.

g¡\bZw� (referring again) of “�bR” (this) and “vlb” (this) in neuter


|�R\ (1st case)

h�l�e\ (2nd case) vQl/vQb vQ Z vQ\hQ

The rest (excepting 1st case) declines like masculine.

g¡\bZw� (referring again) of “�bR” (this) and “vlb” (this) in feminine


|�R\ (1st case)

h�l�e\ (2nd case) vQ\ vQ Z vQ\�

lsl�e\ (3rd case) vQe\


qrR� (5th case)

k�� (6th case) vQeP�

n�R� (7th case) vQeP�

The rest declines as usual.

2/2 2/3

3/1

6/2

7/2

2/1

2/2 2/3 2/1

2/2 2/3

3/1

6/2

7/2

2/1

Topic X – Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

125

Topic X

Declension of

Consonant-ending Nominal bases

Declension is done by suffixing nominal suffix (n Mq-|�e [sup-pratyaya]) to nominal

base (|\hlqhbi [prātipadika]). This concept is most useful when declining consonant-ending

|\hlqhbis because most of the declined forms are made by simply combining |\hlqhbi and

n Mq-|�e.

While combining, consonant sandhi rules are applied in many places. Therefore,

consonant sandhi rules taught in Volume 2 – Phonetics & Sandhi are to be studied along

with 2this section.

Common steps in declension of z�c (consonant-ending) |\hlqhbi

� n Mq-|�es without �l ` (indicatory) letter are suffixed to |\hlqhbi (nominal base).

E.g., n ML� ` + n ` 1/1 � In 1/1, |�e “n” is elided after consonant.

E.g., n ML� ` + 1/1

� Sandhi rules apply between the last letter of |\hlqhbi and the first letter of n Mq-|�e. If

the g� is termed as qb, the last letter of |\hlqhbi is considered to be at the end of qb,

thus sandhi rules for qb\c (end of qb) will apply. The reference is given with the

Pā=ini-sūtra numbers found in the Consonant Sandhi section in Volume 2.

E.g., RNl ` + O\R ` 3/2

RNb + O\R ` 3/2 The last consonant at the end of qb is softened. (Ref. 8.3.29)

� n ` at the end of the qb (word, declined form), is changed into hanL f.

E.g., n ML� ` + gn ` 1/3

n ML�n ` 1/3

n ML�� 1/3


126

n Mq-|�es were originally taught by Pā=ini with indicatory letters, or �l ` [it] in

grammatical terminology. When being used, �l ` (indicatory) letters are removed, as seen in

the next charts.




2nd case gR ` [am] Ô [au] gn ` [as]

3rd case � [ā] O\R ` [bhyām] h^n ` [bhis]

4th case v [e] O\R ` [bhyām] On ` [bhyas]

5th case gn ` [as] O\R ` [bhyām] On ` [bhyas]

6th case gn ` [as] Ón ` [os] �R ` [ām]

7th case � [i] Ón ` [os] n M [su]

n Mq-|�es (nominal suffixes) modified for declension in neuter


1st case -/gR ` [am] * � [ī] � [i]

2nd case -/gR ` [am] * � [ī] � [i]

* When |\hlqhbi ends with short g, the suffix is gR `. Otherwise, the suffix is elided.

The 3rd case onwards is the same as for masculine and feminine.

Note that there is no 8th case. The suffixes of the 1st case (|�R\ ha^hp�) alone are used

in the sense of vocative (n�P[QR ` [sambodhanam]). However, the singular form of vocative

may be different from the normal singular form of the 1st case. For the sake of addressing

this only, the extra row for vocative (n�P[QR) is added in a declensional chart. To avoid

confusing with the original 1st case, abbreviations S/1, S/2, and S/3 are used in this book.

The student has to be aware that S stands for the 1st case in vocative (n�P[QR).


127

Pā=ini observed three different patterns of declension in three different sections in

the declensional chart. They are named as shown below for the sake of explaining the

ways of declension in an efficient manner.

Three sections in masculine and feminine

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) n ` [s] Ô [au] gn ` [as]

h�l�e\ (2nd case) gR ` [am] Ô [au]

lsl�e\ (3rd case)


qrR� (5th case)

k�� (6th case)

n�R� (7th case)

Three sections in neuter

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) � [i]

h�l�e\ (2nd case) � [i]

The rest is the same as masculine and feminine.

The |�e in this section of the charts is termed na fQ\Rî\Q [sarvanāmasthāna].




128

1. �-ending in q M�h�� (masculine)/��h�� (feminine) – n ML� ` [suga=]

n ML� ` (one who counts well)14 is the simplest to decline among all |\hlqhbis because it

requires the least numbers of modification in declension. Declension is done as follows:

n ML� ` + n ` 1/1 n Mq-|�e without �l ` letter is suffixed for declension.

n ML� ` + 1/1 n ` of 1/1 is to be elided after consonant.

n ML� ` 1/1 This is the final form of 1/1.

n ML� ` + Ô 1/2 n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

n ML�Â 1/2 This is the final form of 1/2.

Etc.

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “n ML�” (one who counts well) �i\j\c-w{�

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) n ML� ` n ML�Â n ML��

h�l�e\ (2nd case) n ML�R ` n ML�Â n ML��

lsl�e\ (3rd case) n ML�\ n MLÙO\R ` n MLhÙ^�

dl M�� (4th case) n ML�Z n MLÙO\R ` n MLÙO�

qrR� (5th case) n ML�� n MLÙO\R ` n MLÙO�

k�� (6th case) n ML�� n ML�P� n ML�\R `

n�R� (7th case) n MLh� n ML�P� n MLÙn M

n�P[QR ` (Vocative) zZ n ML� ` zZ n ML�Â zZ n ML��

n ML� ` (one who counts well) can be masculine or feminine, depending on the gender

of the |\hlqhbi qualified by the word n ML� `. In either gender, it declines in the same manner.

14 The |\hlqhbi n ML� ` is derived from �qnL f n M (well) and [\l M L� ` (to count) with “zero-suffix” denoting

the agent of the action. By this suffix, the [\l M becomes |\hlqhbi.

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/3

3/3

4/3

5/3

6/3

7/3

2/2

3/2

4/2

5/2

6/2

7/2

3/1

2/1

4/1

5/1

6/1

7/1

S/3 S/2 S/1


129

Words which decline in the same manner:

e� `, g� ` – |�\z\j (abbreviations used in Pā=ini grammar)

Words which decline in the same manner except for 7/3, where n ` becomes k `. (Ref. 8.3.59):

z�, É�, vm – |�\z\j (abbreviations used in Pā=ini grammar)

Assignment on �-ending |\hlqhbi in masculine and feminine

� Decline n ML� `, e� `, z�, and É� in 24 forms by the following steps:

z� + n ` 1/1 n Mq-|�e without �l ` letter is suffixed for declension.

z� + 1/1 n ` of 1/1 is to be elided after consonant.

z� 1/1 This is the final form of 1/1.

z� + Ô 1/2 n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

z�Â 1/2 This is the final form of 1/2.

z� + gn ` 1/3 n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

z�� 1/3 The last n ` at the end of qb becomes hanL f. This is the final form of 1/3.

....

z� + � 7/1 n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

zh� 7/1 This is the final form of 7/1.

z� + Ón ` 7/2 n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

z�P� 7/2 The last n ` at the end of qb becomes hanL f. This is the final form of 7/2.

z� + n M 7/3 n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

z� + k M 7/3 n ` in suffix becomes R½[ fø because � is preceding. (Ref. 8.3.59)

z0k M 7/3 This is the final form of 7/3.



130

2. l/b/[/^-ending in q M�h�� (masculine)/��h�� (feminine) – RNl ` [marut]

For |\hlqhbis ending with É� (consonants from 1st to 4th of the classes and sibilants),

the last letter becomes 3rd of the class at the end of qb. (Ref. }æì 8.2.39)

However, it becomes hardened in 7/3, and optionally in 1/1. (Ref. dìf 8.4.55, 8.4.56)

The steps of declension of RNl ` (wind god) are described below.

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “RNl” (wind god) li\j\c-q M�h��-w{�

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) RNl/RNb RNlÂ RNl�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) RNlR ` RNlÂ RNl�

lsl�e\ (3rd case) RNl\ RN O\R ` RNh �

dl M�� (4th case) RNlZ RN O\R ` RN O�

qrR� (5th case) RNl� RN O\R ` RN O�

k�� (6th case) RNl� RNlP� RNl\R `

n�R� (7th case) RNhl RNlP� RN� M

n�P[QR ` (Vocative) zZ RNl/RNb zZ RNlÂ zZ RNl�

The rest is like n ML� `.

Steps of declension

RNl ` + n ` 1/1 n Mq-|�e without �l ` letter is suffixed for declension.

RNl ` + 1/1 n ` of 1/1 is to be elided after consonant.

RNb 1/1 The consonant at the end of qb becomes softened. (Ref. 8.3.29)

RNl ` 1/1 Optionally, the last consonant is hardened. (Ref. 8.4.56)

RNl/RNb 1/1 These are the final forms of 1/1.

RNl ` + Ô 1/2 n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

RNlÂ 1/2 This is the final form of 1/2.

...

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/3

3/3

4/3

5/3

6/3

7/3

2/2

3/2

4/2

5/2

6/2

7/2

3/1

2/1

4/1

5/1

6/1

7/1

S/3 S/2 S/1


131

In qb section (shown in gray background in the table):

RNl ` + O\R ` 3/2 n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

RNb + O\R ` 3/2 The consonant at the end of qb becomes softened. (Ref. 8.3.29)

RN O\R ` 3/2 This is the final form of 3/2.

RNl ` + n M 7/3 n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

RNb + n M 7/3 The consonant at the end of qb becomes softened. (Ref. 8.3.29)

RNl ` + n M 7/3 The consonant followed by hard consonant becomes hardened. (Ref. 8.4.55)

RN� M 7/3 This is the final form of 7/3.

These |\hlqhbis decline in the same manner: (m. = masculine; f. = feminine)

l-ending words: gl ` - m. short g na f sl ` - m./f. the one who supports everything

hax Ml ` - f. lightning is ¹iRfis l ` - m./f. the one who has done everything

b-ending words: n Müb - m. friend na fhab - m./f. one who knows everything

Rsb - f. clay �qb - f. calamity

nÁb - f. wealth �qhQkb - f. upani:ad

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “n Müb” (friend) bi\j\c-q M�h��-w{�

n Müb + n ` 1/1

n Müb 1/1

n Mül ` 1/1 (Ref. 8.4.56)

n Müb + Ô 1/2

n MübÂ 1/2

n Müb + O\R ` 3/2

n Müb O\R ` 3/2

n Müb + n M 7/3

n Mül ` + n M 7/3 (Ref. 8.4.55)

n Mü� M 7/3


1st case n Mül/n Müb ` 1/1 n MübÂ 1/2 n Müb� 1/3 2nd case n MübR ` 2/1 n MübÂ 2/2 n Müb� 2/3 3rd case n Müb\ 3/1 n Mü O\R ` 3/2 n Müh � 3/3 4th case n MübZ 4/1 n Mü O\R ` 4/2 n Mü O� 4/3 5th case n Müb� 5/1 n Mü O\R ` 5/2 n Mü O� 5/3 6th case n Müb� 6/1 n MübP� 6/2 n Müb\R ` 6/3 7th case n Mühb 7/1 n MübP� 7/2 n Mü� M 7/3

Vocative zZ n Mül/n Müb ` S/1 zZ n MübÂ S/2 zZ n Müb� S/3


132

[-ending words:

¦ M[ ` - f. hunger nhR[ ` - f. fuel

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “¦ M[” (hunger) [i\j\c-��h��-w{� ¦ M[ ` + n ` 1/1

¦ M[ ` + 1/1

¦ Mb 1/1 (}æì 8.2.39)

¦ Ml ` 1/1 (dìf 8.4.56)

¦ M[ ` + Ô 1/2

¦ M[Â 1/2

¦ M[ ` + O\R ` 3/2

¦ Mb O\R ` 3/2 (}æì 8.2.39)

¦ M[ ` + n M 7/3

¦ Mb + n M 7/3 (}æì 8.2.39)

¦ Ml ` + n M 7/3 (dìf 8.4.55)

¦ M� M 7/3

^-ending words:

gQ MóM ` - f. a name of meter iiM^ ` - f. direction

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “gQ MóM ” (a name of meter) î\j\c-��h��-w{�

gQ MóM ` + n ` 1/1

gQ MóM ` + 1/1

gQ MóMo ` 1/1 (}æì 8.2.39)

gQ MóMq ` 1/1 (dìf 8.4.56)

gQ MóM ` + Ô 1/2

gQ MóM Â 1/2

gQ MóM ` + O\R ` 3/2

gQ MóM1\R ` 3/2 (}æì 8.2.39)

gQ MóM ` + n M 7/3

gQ MóMo ` + n M 7/3 (}æì 8.2.39)

gQ MóMq ` + n M 7/3 (dìf 8.4.55)

gQ MóMö M 7/3

Assignment on l/b/[/^-ending in masculine and feminine

� Decline all the |\hlqhbis in the above lists by the steps shown, and do Exercise #36.


1st case ¦ Ml/¦ Mb ` 1/1 ¦ M[Â 1/2 ¦ M[� 1/3 2nd case ¦ M[R ` 2/1 ¦ M[Â 2/2 ¦ M[� 2/3 3rd case ¦ M[\ 3/1 ¦ M O\R ` 3/2 ¦ Mh � 3/3 4th case ¦ M[ Z 4/1 ¦ M O\R ` 4/2 ¦ M O� 4/3 5th case ¦ M[� 5/1 ¦ M O\R ` 5/2 ¦ M O� 5/3 6th case ¦ M[� 6/1 ¦ M[P� 6/2 ¦ M[\R ` 6/3 7th case ¦ Mh[ 7/1 ¦ M[P� 7/2 ¦ M� M 7/3

Vocative zZ ¦ Ml/¦ Mb ` S/1 zZ ¦ M[Â S/2 zZ ¦ M[� S/3


1st case gQ MóMq/gQ MóMo ` 1/1 gQ MóM Â 1/2 gQ MóM � 1/3 2nd case gQ MóM R ` 2/1 gQ MóM Â 2/2 gQ MóM � 2/3 3rd case gQ MóM \ 3/1 gQ MóM1\R ` 3/2 gQ MóMh2� 3/3 4th case gQ MóM Z 4/1 gQ MóM1\R ` 4/2 gQ MóM1� 4/3 5th case gQ MóM � 5/1 gQ MóM1\R ` 5/2 gQ MóM1� 5/3 6th case gQ MóM � 6/1 gQ MóM P� 6/2 gQ MóM \R ` 6/3 7th case gQ MóMh^ 7/1 gQ MóM P� 7/2 gQ MóMö M 7/3

Vocative zZ gQ MóMq/gQ MóMo ` S/1 zZ gQ MóM Â S/2 zZ gQ MóM � S/3


133

3. d/}-ending in q M�h�� (masculine)/��h�� (feminine) – �d ` [6c]

For |\hlqhbis ending with d/} `, the last letter becomes i/L ` at the end of qb. (Ref. iMì

8.2.30) Other steps such as softening and hardening are the same as before.

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “�d” (hymn, mantra) di\j\c-q M�h��-w{�

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) �i/�L ` �dÂ �d�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) �dR ` �dÂ �d�

lsl�e\ (3rd case) �d\ �3\R ` �h4�

dl M�� (4th case) �dZ �3\R ` �3�

qrR� (5th case) �d� �3\R ` �3�

k�� (6th case) �d� �dP� �d\R `

n�R� (7th case) �hd �dP� �¦ M

n�P[QR ` (Vocative) zZ �i/�L ` zZ �dÂ zZ �d�

The rest declines like RNl `.

�d ` + n ` 1/1

�d ` + 1/1

�i + 1/1 (Ref. 8.2.30)

�L ` + 1/1 (Ref. 8.2.39)

�i + 1/1 (Ref. 8.4.56)

�d ` + Ô 1/2

�dÂ 1/2

�d ` + O\R ` 3/2

�i + O\R ` 3/2 (Ref. 8.2.30)

�L ` + O\R ` 3/2 (Ref. 8.2.39)

�d ` + n M 7/3

�i + n M 7/3 (Ref. 8.2.30)

�L ` + n M 7/3 (Ref. 8.2.39)

�L ` + k M 7/3 (Ref. 8.3.59)

�i + k M 7/3 (Ref. 8.4.55)

d-ending words:

a\d ` - f. word ìd ` - f. skin

}-ending words:

�hì} ` - m. priest h^k} ` -m. doctor

Assignment on d/}-ending in masculine and feminine

� Decline all the |\hlqhbis in the above lists by the steps shown, and do Exercise #37.

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/3

3/3

4/3

5/3

6/3

7/3

2/2

3/2

4/2

5/2

6/2

7/2

3/1

2/1

4/1

5/1

6/1

7/1

S/3 S/2 S/1


134

4. �Q-ending in q M�h��/��h�� – ePhLQ ` [yogin]/ePhLQ� [yoginī]

The |\hlqhbi ePhLQ ` [yogin] is derived from the word ePL [yoga] by suffixing �Q ` [in], a

suffix in the sense of “one who has ...”. Thus, ePhLQ ` means “one who is with ePL”.

In the declension in masculine: (See the next page for the steps of declension.)

In 1/1, the elongation (b�Ç f) of the penultimate (�q[\) � and the elision of Q ` of |\hlqhbi

are observed, while in S/1 |\hlqhbi remains the same.

At the end of qb, the elision of the last Q ` of |\hlqhbi takes place. (Ref. Q�Pq 8.2.7)

For some |\hlqhbi, �ì (Ref. 8.4.1) takes place when gd-beginning n Mq-5ee follows.

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “ePhLQ” (one who is with ePL) Qi\j\c-q M�h��-w{�

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) ePL� ePhLQÂ ePhLQ�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) ePhLQR ` ePhLQÂ ePhLQ�

lsl�e\ (3rd case) ePhLQ\ ePhLO\R ` ePhLh^�

dl M�� (4th case) ePhLQ Z ePhLO\R ` ePhLO�

qrR� (5th case) ePhLQ� ePhLO\R ` ePhLO�

k�� (6th case) ePhLQ� ePhLQP� ePhLQ\R `

n�R� (7th case) ePhLhQ ePhLQP� ePhLk M

n�P[QR ` (Vocative) zZ ePhLQ ` zZ ePhLQÂ zZ ePhLQ�

The rest declines like n ML� `.

�Q-ending words:

gh[i\hjQ ` - eligible person w\h�fQ ` - the Lord Vi:=u

�\hQQ ` - one who has knowledge w\h�Q ` - one who knows the scripture

bZhzQ ` - one who has a body n�n\hjQ ` - saÖsārin

qh¦Q ` - bird n\h¦Q ` - witness

|\h�Q ` - one who lives ²\hRQ ` - master

a �hjQ ` - enemy zh³Q ` - elephant

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/1 2/2 2/3

3/1 3/2 3/3

4/1 4/2 4/3

5/1 5/2 5/3

6/1 6/2 6/3

7/1 7/2 7/3

S/1 S/2 S/3


135

Steps of declension:

ePhLQ ` + n ` 1/1 n Mq-|�e without �l ` letter is suffixed for declension.

ePhLQ ` + 1/1 n ` of 1/1 is to be elided after consonant.

ePL�Q ` 1/1 Being �Q-ending |\hlqhbi, in 1/1 the penultimate � is elongated.

ePL� 1/1 At the end of qb, the last Q ` of |\hlqhbi is elided. (Ref. 8.2.7)

ePhLQ ` + n ` S/1 n Mq-|�e without �l ` letter is suffixed for declension.

ePhLQ ` + S/1 n ` of 1/1 is to be elided after consonant.

ePhLQ ` S/1 For n�P[Q, the elongation of the penultimate (�q[\b�Ç f�) and the elision of Q `

does not take place.

ePhLQ ` + Ô 1/2 n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

ePhLQÂ 1/2 This is the final form of 1/2.

...

In qb section:

ePhLQ ` + O\R ` 3/2 n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

ePhL + O\R ` 3/2 At the end of qb, the last Q ` of |\hlqhbi is elided. (Ref. 8.2.7)

ePhLO\R ` 3/2 This is the final form of 3/2.

ePhLQ ` + n M 7/3 n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

ePhL + n M 7/3 At the end of qb, the last Q ` of |\hlqhbi is elided. (Ref. 8.2.7)

ePhL + k M 7/3 Being preceded by ��-iM , n ` in suffix becomes R½[ fø. (Ref. 8.3.59)

ePhLk M 7/3 This is the final form of 7/3.

In the declension in feminine, a feminine suffix “�” is added to |\hlqhbi, resulting in

“ePhLQ�”, and it declines like “Qb�”.

Assignment on �Q-ending in masculine/feminine

� Make the declension charts for the |\hlqhbis in the list above, both in masculine and

feminine.



136

5. Rl/al-ending in q M�h��/��h�� – ^Lal ` [bhagavat]/^Lal� [bhagavatī]

The |\hlqhbi ^Lal ` [bhagavat] is derived from the word ^L [bhaga] (virture) by

suffixing Rl ` [mat], a suffix in the sense of “one who has ...”. The R ` of Rl ` is changed into a `

when |\hlqhbi has g/�/R ` at the end or at penultimate. Thus, the form becomes “^Lal”,

and it means “one who has ^L”.

In the declension in masculine: (See the next page for the steps of declension.)

In na fQ\Rî\Q, an extra letter Q ` is inserted after the last vowel of |\hlqhbi.

In 1/1, the elongation (b�Ç f�) of penultimate (�q[\) of the extra Q ` and the elision of l `

of |\hlqhbi are observed, while in S/1 elongation does not happen.

Other than na fQ\Rî\Q, it declines like RNl `.

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “^Lal” (the Lord) gìc-q M�h��-w{�15



“^Lal�”, and it declines like “Qb�”.

15 All the suffixes in this section end with gl M¢. |\hlqhbis ending with such suffix are called gìc.

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) ^La\Q ` ^LacÂ ^Lac�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) ^LacR ` ^LacÂ ^Lal�

lsl�e\ (3rd case) ^Lal\ ^LabO\R ` ^Labh^�

dl M�� (4th case) ^LalZ ^LabO\R ` ^LabO�

qrR� (5th case) ^Lal� ^LabO\R ` ^LabO�

k�� (6th case) ^Lal� ^LalP� ^Lal\R `

n�R� (7th case) ^Lahl ^LalP� ^La� M

n�P[QR ` (Vocative) zZ ^LaQ ` zZ ^LacÂ zZ ^Lac�

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/3

3/3

4/3

5/3

6/3

7/3

2/2

3/2

4/2

5/2

6/2

7/2

3/1

2/1

4/1

5/1

6/1

7/1

S/3 S/2 S/1


137

Rl-ending words:

[Qal ` - one who has wealth o MhuRl ` - one who has o Mhu

�Ü�al ` - one who has �Ü� hax\al ` - one who has knowledge

��Rl ` - one who has wealth zQ MRl ` - Hanumanji

The following |\hlqhbis are also derived with gl M¢-ending suffixes. They decline in

the same manner as Rl-ending |\hlqhbi in both masculine and feminine. (Llal�, l\al�, etc.)

Llal ` - one who has gone � Mlal ` - one who has heard

�pal ` - one who has said áóal ` - one who has seen

l\al ` - that much âl ` - respectful way to address “you”


In na fQ\Rî\Q section:

^Lal ` + n ` 1/1 n Mq-|�e without �l ` letter is suffixed for declension.

^Lal ` + 1/1 n ` of 1/1 is to be elided after consonant.

^Lac ` 1/1 Being “Rl”-suffix ending |\hlqhbi, in na fQ\Rî\Q an extra letter Q ` is inserted

after the last vowel of |\hlqhbi.

^La\c ` 1/1 Being “Rl”-suffix ending |\hlqhbi, in 1/1 the g before the Q ` is elongated.

^La\Q ` 1/1 Being the last letter of conjunct consonants at the end of qb, l ` is elided.

^LaQ ` S/1 In n�P[Q, the entire steps are the same as 1/1 except for the elongation.

^Lal ` + Ô 1/2 n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

^Lac ` + Ô 1/2 Being “Rl”-suffix ending |\hlqhbi, in na fQ\Rî\Q an extra letter Q ` is inserted

after the last vowel of |\hlqhbi.

^LacÂ 1/2 This is the final form of 1/2.

For the rest of na fQ\Rî\Q, declension is like 1/2.

In other sections: Same as RNl `

Assignment on Rl/al-ending in masculine/feminine

� Make the declension charts for the |\hlqhbis in the above lists, both in masculine and

feminine.



138

6. wls¢-ending in q M�h��/��h�� – nl ` [sat]/nl� [satī]

The |\hlqhbi nl ` [sat] is derived from the [\l M gn ` [as] (to be, to exist) by suffixing wls¢

[śat6], whose content is only gl ` [at], a suffix in the sense of “one who is doing ...”. After

some modifications, the form becomes “nl”, and it means “one who is existing”.

In the declension in masculine:

In na fQ\Rî\Q, an extra letter Q ` is inserted after the last vowel of |\hlqhbi.

In 1/1 and S/1, the last l ` drops. Other than na fQ\Rî\Q, it declines like RNl `.

Note: the only difference between the declensions of Rl/al-ending and wls¢-ending

masculine is the presence and absence respectively of the elongation (b�Ç f) of penultimate

(�q[\) in 1/1.

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “nl” (being, one who is existing) w¾c-q M�h��-w{� 16

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) nQ ` ncÂ nc�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) ncR ` ncÂ nl�

lsl�e\ (3rd case) nl\ nbO\R ` nbh^�

dl M�� (4th case) nlZ nbO\R ` nbO�

qrR� (5th case) nl� nbO\R ` nbO�

k�� (6th case) nl� nlP� nl\R `

n�R� (7th case) nhl nlP� n� M

n�P[QR ` (Vocative) zZ nQ ` zZ ncÂ zZ nc�


16 The |\hlqhbi which ends with wls¢ is called w¾c.(wls¢ + gc with e�-nh�)

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/1 2/2 2/3

3/1 3/2 3/3

4/1 4/2 4/3

5/1 5/2 5/3

6/1 6/2 6/3

S/2 S/3 S/1

7/1 7/2 7/3


139


“nl�”, and it declines like “Qb�”. 17

wls-ending words:

qdl ` - one who is cooking qæel ` - one who is seeing

hl�l ` - one who is standing ®\el ` - one who is meditating

Assignment on wls¢-ending in masculine

� Make the declension charts for the |\hlqhbis in the above list in masculine.


17 If the [\l M is of 1st/4th L�, Q ` is added after the g of gl `. E.g, qdc�, qæec�, hl�c�, ®\ec�, b�¨c�. If

the [\l M is of 6th L� or �-ending [\l M of 2nd L�, the addition of Q ` is optional. E.g., l Mbc�/l Mbl�,

e\c�/e\l�


140

7. gQ-ending in q M�h�� (masculine) – ��Q ` [ātman]

In na fQ\Rî\Q, except for S/1, elongation (b�Ç f) of penultimate (�q[\) takes place.

At the end of qb, except for S/1, the elision of the last Q ` of |\hlqhbi takes place (Ref.

8.2.7).

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “��Q” (self) gQ-gc-q M�h��-w{�

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) ��\ ��\QÂ ��\Q�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) ��\QR ` ��\QÂ ��Q�

lsl�e\ (3rd case) ��Q\ ��O\R ` ��h^�

dl M�� (4th case) ��QZ ��O\R ` ��O�

qrR� (5th case) ��Q� ��O\R ` ��O�

k�� (6th case) ��Q� ��QP� ��Q\R `

n�R� (7th case) ��hQ ��QP� ��n M

n�P[QR ` (Vocative) zZ ��Q ` zZ ��\QÂ zZ ��\Q�

The rest declines like ePhLQ `.

gQ-ending masculine words:

gßQ ` - way, path £¤Q ` - Brahmājī

gæRQ ` - stone ^½RQ ` * - many-ness

Ñ Q ` - steam RhzRQ ` * - greatness

q\6Q ` - q\q j\}Q ` * - king

* For |\hlqhbis which does not have a/R-ending conjunct consonants before gQ `, in ^

section, the g of the last gQ ` disappears (optional in 7/1) and the form will become – j\�� 2/3, j\�\ 3/1, j\� Z 4/1, j\�� 5/1, 6/1, j\�P� 6/2, 7/2, j\�\R ` 6/3, j\h� or j\}hQ 7/1.

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/3

3/3

4/3

5/3

6/3

7/3

2/2

3/2

4/2

5/2

6/2

7/2

3/1

2/1

4/1

5/1

6/1

7/1

S/3 S/2 S/1


141



��Q ` + n ` 1/1 n Mq-|�e without �l ` letter is suffixed for declension.

��Q ` + 1/1 n ` of 1/1 is to be elided after consonant.

��\Q ` 1/1 Being gQ-ending |\hlqhbi, in na fQ\Rî\Q the penultimate g is elongated.

��\ 1/1 At the end of qb, the last Q ` of |\hlqhbi is elided. (Ref. 8.2.7)

��Q ` + n ` S/1 n Mq-|�e without �l ` letter is suffixed for declension.

��Q ` + S/1 n ` of 1/1 is to be elided after consonant.

��Q ` S/1 For n�P[Q, the elongation of the penultimate (�q[\b�Ç f�) and the elision of Q `

do not take place.

��Q ` + Ô 1/2 n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

��\Q ` + Ô ½ Being gQ-ending |\hlqhbi, in na fQ\Rî\Q the penultimate g is elongated.

��\QÂ 1/2 This is the final form of 1/2.

In ^ section:

��Q ` + gn ` 2/3 n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

��Q� 2/3 This is the final form of 2/3. n ` at the end of qb becomes hanL f.

|\hlqhbi with * in the list in ^ section:

j\}Q ` + gn ` 2/3 n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

j\} ` Q ` + gn ` 2/3 For some Q-ending |\hlqhbis, the g of gQ ` is elided. (Optional in 7/1)

j\} ` Ê ` + gn ` 2/3 Because of the contact with } `, Q ` becomes Ê `. (Ref. 8.4.40)

j\�� 2/3 This is the final form of 2/3. n ` at the end of qb becomes hanL f.

In qb section:

The same as ePhLQ `. The last Q ` of |\hlqhbi is elided at the end of qb. (Ref. 8.2.7)

Assignment on gQ-ending in masculine

� Make the declension charts for the |\hlqhbis in the list above.



142

8. gQ-ending in Qq M�nih�� (neuter) – £¤Q ` [brahman]

The rules for declension of gQ-ending in masculine and neuter are the same. The

only difference is the modified n Mq-|�es in 1st and 2nd case in neuter, by which the g�s for

singular and dual are termed qb and ^, respectively, and the suffix � in plural is termed

na fQ\Rî\Q.

In neuter, n M-|�e in 1st and 2nd cases are specially modified as shown before.


1st case - * � [ī] � [i]

2nd case - * � [ī] � [i]

* When |\hlqhbi ends with a letter other than a short g, the suffix is elided.

In na fQ\Rî\Q, elongation (b�Ç f) of penultimate (�q[\) takes place.

At the end of qb, the elision of the last Q ` of |\hlqhbi takes place. (Ref. 8.2.7)

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “£¤Q” (brahman) gQ-gc-Qq M�nih��-w{�

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) £¤ £¤�� £¤\h�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) £¤ £¤�� £¤\h�

lsl�e\ (3rd case) £¤�\ £¤O\R ` £¤h^�

dl M�� (4th case) £¤�Z £¤O\R ` £¤O�

qrR� (5th case) £¤�� £¤O\R ` £¤O�

k�� (6th case) £¤�� £¤�P� £¤�\R `

n�R� (7th case) £¤h� £¤�P� £¤n M

n�P[QR ` (Vocative) zZ £¤Q ` zZ £¤�� zZ £¤\h�

The rest declines like ��Q ` in q M�h��.

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/3

3/3

4/3

5/3

6/3

7/3

2/2

3/2

4/2

5/2

6/2

7/2

3/1

2/1

4/1

5/1

6/1

7/1

S/3 S/2 S/1


143

gQ-ending neuter words:

iR fQ ` - action [\RQ ` * - place ¨PRQ ` * - space, sky

}8Q ` - birth Q\RQ ` * - name

* For |\hlqhbis which does not have a/R-ending conjunct consonants before gQ `, in ^

section, the g of the last gQ ` disappears (optional in 7/1) and the form will become - Q\·� 1/2,

2/2, Q\·\ 3/1, Q\·Z 4/1, Q\·� 5/1, 6/1, Q\·P� 6/2, 7/2, Q\·\R ` 6/3, Q\h· 7/1 or Q\RhQ 7/1.


In 1/1, S/1, and 2/1:

£¤Q ` + 1/1 n M¢ and gR ` are elided when |\hlqhbi in neuter does not end with a short g.

£¤ 1/1 At the end of qb, the last Q ` of |\hlqhbi is elided. (Ref. 8.2.7)

£¤Q ` + S/1 For n�P[Q, the elision of Q ` does not take place.

In ^ section:

£¤Q ` + � 1/2 The modified form of n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

£¤�� 1/2 When applicable, �ìR ` takes place (Ref. 8.4.2).

|\hlqhbi with * in the list in ^ section:

Q\RQ ` + � 1/2 The modified form of n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

Q\R ` Q ` + � 1/2 For some Q-ending |\hlqhbis, the g of gQ ` is elided. (Optional in 7/1)

Q\·� 1/2 This is the final form of 1/2.


£¤Q ` + � 1/3 The modified form of n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

£¤\Q ` + � 1/3 Being gQ-ending |\hlqhbi, in na fQ\Rî\Q the penultimate g is elongated.

£¤\h� 1/3 When applicable, �ìR ` takes place (Ref. 8.4.2).

In qb section:

The same as ��Q `. The last Q ` of |\hlqhbi is elided at the end of qb. (Ref. 8.2.7)

Assignment on gQ-ending in neuter

� Make the declension charts for the |\hlqhbis listed above.



144

9. gn-ending in Qq M�nih�� (neuter) – RQn ` [manas]

In na fQ\Rî\Q, an extra letter Q ` is inserted after the last vowel of |\hlqhbi. Then, the

elongation (b�Ç f) of penultimate (�q[\) of the extra Q ` takes place. Finally, that Q ` becomes

gQ M²\j because of the following n `. (Ref. 8.3.24)

In qb section, the n ` at the end of qb becomes as though hanL f, to which modifications

by hanL fnh� are observed according to the following letter. (Ref. hanL fnh��)

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “RQn” (mind) gn-gc-Qq M�nih��-w{�

The rest declines like £¤Q `.

gn-ending neuter words:

v[n ` - fuel

d Zln ` - consciousness

ÈÃn ` - the Veda

lqn ` - religious discipline

lRn ` - darkness

l Z}n ` - brilliance

qen ` - milk, water

ewn ` - fame

j}n ` - dust

adn ` - speech, word

aen ` - age

hwjn ` - head

gn-ending adjective words:

Lj�en ` - more important � Zen ` - better

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) RQ� RQn� RQ\�hn

h�l�e\ (2nd case) RQ� RQn� RQ\�hn

lsl�e\ (3rd case) RQn\ RQPO\R ` RQPh^�

dl M�� (4th case) RQn Z RQPO\R ` RQPO�

qrR� (5th case) RQn� RQPO\R ` RQPO�

k�� (6th case) RQn� RQnP� RQn\R `

n�R� (7th case) RQhn RQnP� RQ9 M/RQ�n M

n�P[QR ` (Vocative) zZ RQ� zZ RQn� zZ RQ\�hn

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/1 2/2 2/3

3/1 3/2 3/3

4/1 4/2 4/3

5/1 5/2 5/3

6/1 6/2 6/3

7/1 7/2 7/3

S/1 S/2 S/3


145


In 1/1, S/1, and 2/1:

RQn ` + 1/1 n M¢ and gR ` are elided when |\hlqhbi in neuter does not end with a short g.

RQ� 1/1 n ` at the end of qb becomes hanL f.

In ^ section:

RQn ` + � 1/2 The modified form of n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

RQn� 1/2


RQn ` + � 1/3 The modified form of n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

RQ: ` + � 1/3 Being n-ending |\hlqhbi, in na fQ\Rî\Q an extra letter Q ` is inserted after the

last vowel of |\hlqhbi.

RQ\: ` + � 1/3 The penultimate of the extra Q ` is elongated.

RQ\�hn 1/3 Within a qb, Q ` followed by n ` becomes gQ M²\j. (Ref. 8.3.24)

In qb section:

RQn ` + O\R ` 2/3 n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

(RQ� + O\R ` 2/3 n ` at the end of qb as though18 becomes hanL f.)

RQP+ O\R ` 2/3 “QRP QR�” nh�� (Ref. Volume 2 in hanL fnh��) is as though applied.

RQn ` + n M 7/3 n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

RQ� + n M 7/3 n ` at the end of qb becomes hanL f.

RQn+ n M 7/3 The optional n ` for hanL f when n ` follows. (Ref. Volume 2 in hanL fnh��)

Assignment on gn-ending in neuter

� Make the declension charts for the |\hlqhbis in the list above.


18 This becoming hanL f and its modifications are said to be “as though” because they do not happen

through the process of Pā=ini-sūtras.


146

10. �k/�k `-ending in Qq M�nih�� (neuter) – ¥Phlk ` [jyoti:]/d¦ Mk ` [cak:u:]

The declension is similar to gn-ending neuter.

In qb section, the k ` at the end of qb becomes as though hanL f, to which hanL fnh�

modifications are applied, according to the letter which follows. (Ref. hanL fnh��)

When ^ ` (soft consonant) follows, k ` becomes jZÐ (¥PhlO\ fR `, etc.)

In 7/3, the n ` of n M becomes R½[ fø due to the � in ¥Phlk `.

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “¥Phlk” (light) �k `-gc-Qq M�nih��-w{�

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) ¥Phl� ¥Phlk� ¥Pl;hk

h�l�e\ (2nd case) ¥Phl� ¥Phlk� ¥Pl;hk

lsl�e\ (3rd case) ¥Phlk\ ¥PhlO\ fR ` ¥Phlh^ f�

dl M�� (4th case) ¥Phlk Z ¥PhlO\ fR ` ¥PhlOf�

qrR� (5th case) ¥Phlk� ¥PhlO\ fR ` ¥PhlOf�

k�� (6th case) ¥Phlk� ¥PhlkP� ¥Phlk\R `

n�R� (7th case) ¥Phlhk ¥PhlkP� ¥Phl< M/¥Phl�k M

n�P[QR ` (Vocative) zZ ¥Phl� zZ ¥Phlk� zZ ¥Pl;hk

�k-ending neuter words:

ghd fk ` - ray of light zhak ` - oblation

�k-ending neuter words:

The declension is the same as for �k-ending. Just change � into �, and � into Ñ.

�e Mk ` - life [Q Mk ` - bow

e} Mk ` - sacrificial prayer aq Mk ` - body

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/1 2/2 2/3

3/1 3/2 3/3

4/1 4/2 4/3

5/1 5/2 5/3

6/1 6/2 6/3

7/1 7/2 7/3

S/1 S/2 S/3


147


In 1/1, S/1, and 2/1:

¥Phlk ` + 1/1 n M¢ and gR ` are elided when |\hlqhbi in neuter does not end with a short g.

¥Phl� 1/1 k ` at the end of qb becomes hanL f, just like n ` at the end of qb does.

In ^ section:

¥Phlk ` + � 1/2 The modified form of n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

¥Phlk� 1/2 This is the other final form.


¥Phlk ` + � 1/3 The modified form of n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

¥Phl= ` + � 1/3 Being k-ending |\hlqhbi, in na fQ\Rî\Q an extra letter Q ` is inserted after the

last vowel of |\hlqhbi.

¥Pl�= ` + � 1/3 The penultimate of the extra Q ` is elongated.

¥Pl;hk 1/3 Within a qb, Q ` followed by k ` becomes gQ M²\j. (Ref. 8.3.24)

In qb section:

¥Phlk ` + O\R ` 2/3 n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

(¥Phl� + O\R ` 2/3 k ` at the end of qb as though becomes hanL f, just like n ` at the end of qb

does.)

¥Phlj+ O\R ` 2/3 “L MN£ f¤\” nh�� (Ref. Volume 2 in hanL fnh��) is as though applied.

¥Phlk ` + n M 7/3 n Mq-|�e is suffixed for declension.

¥Phl� + n M 7/3 k ` at the end of qb becomes hanL f, just like n ` at the end of qb does.

¥Phl�k M 7/3 n ` of n Mq-|�e becomes R½[ fø. This is one of the final forms.

¥Phl< M 7/3 This is the other final form.

Assignment on �k/�k `-ending in neuter

� Make the declension charts for the |\hlqhbis in the above lists.



148

11. gn-ending in q M�h�� (masculine) – d§Rn ` [candramas]

The gn-ending masculine is easy to decline.

In 1/1, the elongation (b�Ç f) of penultimate (�q[\) takes place.

In S/1, the elongation (b�Ç f) of penultimate (�q[\) does not take place.

In qb section, the declension is the same as RQn `, gn-ending neuter.

For the rest, just simply combine the |\hlqhbi and n Mq-|�e. n ` at the end of qb always

becomes hanL f.

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` “d§Rn” (moon) gn-gc-q M�h��-w{�

adQR ` ha^hp�

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) d§R\� d§RnÂ d§Rn�

h�l�e\ (2nd case) d§RnR ` d§RnÂ d§Rn�

lsl�e\ (3rd case) d§Rn\ d§RPO\R ` d§RPh^�

dl M�� (4th case) d§RnZ d§RPO\R ` d§RPO�

qrR� (5th case) d§Rn� d§RPO\R ` d§RPO�

k�� (6th case) d§Rn� d§RnP� d§Rn\R `

n�R� (7th case) d§Rhn d§RnP� d§R9 M/d§R�n M

n�P[QR ` (Vocative) zZ d§R� zZ d§RnÂ zZ d§Rn�

In qb section, it declines like RQn `. The rest declines like n ML� `.

gn-ending masculine words:

a Z[n ` - the creator n MRQn ` - the one who has good mind

QhdiZln ` - name of a boy who appears in Ka;hopani:ad

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/1 2/2

3/1 3/2 3/3

4/1 4/2 4/3

5/1 5/2 5/3

6/1 6/2 6/3

7/1 7/2 7/3

S/1 S/2

2/3

S/3

Topic XI – Nouns in Apposition (nR\Q\h[ij�R ` [samānādhikara=am])

149

Topic XI

Nouns in Apposition

(nR\Q\h[ij�R ` [samānādhikara=am])

In a sentence there can be two or more nouns in the same case. These two words

can be:

• In apposition (nR\Q\h[ij� [samānādhikara=a])

When these two words indicate the same (nR\Q) object (gh[ij�), they are

said to be in apposition. (nR\Q\h[ij� [samānādhikara=a])

E.g., 1) n MÃj� 1/1 o\�� 1/1 âhl S (There is a beautiful boy.)

• Not in apposition (¨h[ij� [vyadhikara=a])

When these two words indicate different objects, they are not in apposition

(¨h[ij�).

E.g., 2) o\�� 1/1 L}� 1/1 d âl� S (There is a boy and an elephant.)

When nouns are in apposition, two types of relationship are possible. Note that the

relationship can only be determined contextually.

A. Adjective/substantive relationship

(hawZk�-hawZ_-^\a� [viśe:a=a-viśe:ya-bhāva7])

B. Noun/predicate relationship

(�> Zæe-ha[ Ze-^\a� [uddeśya-vidheya-bhāva7])


150

A. Adjective/substantive relationship (hawZk�-hawZ_-^\a� [viśe:a=a-viśe:ya-bhāva7])

� Adjective qualifies substantive.

� This can be called qualifying (hawZk�)-qualified (hawZ_)-relationship (^\a).

� They can be subject, object, or anything in the sentence. They can be in any case.

Ex. 1) n MÃj� 1/1 o\�� 1/1 âhl S (There is a beautiful boy.)

Ex. 2) n MÃjR ` 2/1 o\�R ` 2/1 qæehl S (He sees a beautiful boy.)

Ex. 3) n MÃjZ� 3/1 o\�ZQ 3/1 nz LÛhl S (He goes with a beautiful boy.)

Ex. 4) n MÃj\e 4/1 o\�\e 4/1 bb\hl S (He gives to a beautiful boy.)

Ex. 5) n MÃj\l ` 5/1 o\�\l ` 5/1 }\el ZS (Something is born of a beautiful boy.)

Ex. 6) n MÃjñ 6/1 o\�ñ 6/1 L Zz� gh³S (There is a house of a beautiful boy.)

Ex. 7) n MÃjZ 7/1 o\�Z 7/1 ^hp� gh³S (There is devotion in a beautiful boy.)

B. Noun/predicate relationship (�> Zæe-ha[ Ze-^\a� [uddeśya-vidheya-bhāva7])

� The noun is known to both speaker and listener, while the predicate is known only

to the speaker, not to the listener. To convey what the listener does not know yet

about the noun, the speaker predicates the noun.

� This can be called noun (�> Zæe)-predicate (ha[ Ze)-relationship (^\a).

� They can be subject and subjective complement.

E.g., 1) o\�� 1/1 n MÃj� 1/1 âhl S (The boy is beautiful.)

In this case, the boy is the subject and beautiful is the subjective complement.

� They can be object and objective complement.

E.g., 2) n\ o\�R ` 2/1 n MÃjR ` 2/1 RølZ S (She considers the boy beautiful.)

In this case, the boy is the object and beautiful is the objective complement.


151

Concord between nouns in apposition

� Matching of the h�� (gender) and adQ (number) of words is called concord.

� When the words are adjective and substantive, the adjective has to be in the same

gender and number as the substantive.

E.g., 1) oza� m/1/3 n MÃj\� m/1/3 Ç�\� m/1/3 âhc S (Many beautiful pots exist.)

E.g., 2) o?� f/1/3 n MÃe f� f/1/3 Qx� f/1/3 âhc S (Many beautiful rivers exist.) 19

E.g., 3) o@hQ n/1/3 n MÃj\h� n/1/3 Ð�\hQ n/1/3 âhc S (Many beautiful fruits exist.)

� When they are noun and predicate, the matching of gender and number is not

mandatory.

E.g., 1) �\�ñ 6/1 b Zal\ f/1/1 gh�QÂ m/1/2 S (The presiding deity of the nose is the two

Aśvins.)

E.g., 2) na\ fh� n/2/3 a³½hQ n/2/3 ��jR ` m/2/1 RøZ I/1 S (I consider all objects as Īśvara.)

19 When used in feminine, the adjective n MÃj takes a feminine suffix � and become “n MÃj�”. It

declines as �-ending feminine, like Qb�. (n MÃj�, n MÃe%, n MÃe f�, etc.)

Topic XII – Indeclinables (gëR ` [avyayam])

152

Topic XII

Indeclinables

(gëR ` [avyayam])

gë literally means “that which does not decline”.20

Among nouns (n Mocs) in Sanskrit, some nouns are called gës.

Technically speaking, gë is a subset of |\hlqhbi. Being |\hlqhbi, gë has to be

suffixed with n Mq-|�e in order to become qb, usable form in the language. Thus, gë-qb is

n Moc-qb only. (In many textbooks gë is counted separately from n Moc-qb but this is not

according to Pā=ini’s grammar system.)

The only difference from ordinary |\hlqhbis is that gë does not decline by

suffixing n Mq-|�e. That is why it is called indeclinable.

The following is a list of gë often seen in the language.

d – and

� Positioning of the di\j 21 between words.

E.x. 1) A d B d S (A and B)

E.x. 2) A B d S (A and B)

o Unlike in English, there is no such usage as “A d B”.

� Positioning of the di\j between sentences.

o di\j is generally placed as the second word in the next sentence.

E.g., b Zabt� L MN� haQe ZQ QRhl S va� d Qì\ n w\�� qËhl S

(Devadatta salutes his guru with humility.

20 Q ¨Zhl �hl gëRS 21 Conventionally, the indeclinable d is referred to by the word di\j.


153

And having saluted in this manner, he studies the scripture.)

e�bt� ÓbQ� Q Æ\bhl S y\R� d Q LÛhl S

(Yajñadatta does not eat rice. And he does not go to the village.)

o No sentence starts with d.

� di\j can bring in some words from the previous sentence.

E.g., j\R� 1/1 aQR ` 2/1 LÛhl III/1 S (Rāma goes to the forest.)

�Ü�� 1/1 d S (Lak:ma=a also (goes to the forest).)

By d, ”aQR ` 2/1 LÛhl III/1” are brought down from the previous sentence.

a\ – or

� Same positioning as di\j

E.g., lb a³M lh�Q ` a\ vlh�Q ` a\ Q áæelZ S (That object is not seen there or here.)

l M – whereas, however, indeed


E.g., j\R� LÛhlS �Ü�� l M hl�hl S (j\R goes. Whereas, �Ü� stays.)

hz – indeed, because


E.g., ^P}Q ZQ hz ¦ M[\ w\¸hl S (By eating alone the hunger is appeased.)

gh�� z gh³, [½RP hz áæelZ S (Fire must be here because the smoke is seen.)

�hl - thus

� Converts the words/sentence that comes before into w{²´q (direct speech).

E.g., “ì� ijPhk” �hl L MN� R\� abhlS (Teacher tells me “you do“.)

� In Sanskrit, there is no indirect speech.

� Where the quote starts is understood by the context only.

va – only, indeed

� Restriction

E.g., viRZa ²�ijPhR S (I take only one.)


154

� ga[\j�R ` (emphasis)

E.g., gz� l Mó� vaS (I am indeed happy.)

Q – no, not

� Q always goes with a verb.

E.g., Q hz �\Q ZQ náw� qha¾R ` �z haxlZ S (There is no purifier equivalent to knowledge.)

� When compounded with a word beginning with a consonant, the form becomes g.

E.g., Q [R f� (in sentence) = g[R f� (in compound)

When compounded with a word beginning with a vowel, the form becomes gQ `.

E.g., Q ��\ (in sentence) = gQ\�\ (in compound)

vaR ` – in this manner, thus

E.g., l¾ va� nhlS (When that is so, ... When that is the case, …)

ghq – even, also

E.g., iae� ghq g¾ RPhzl\�S (Even poets are confused in this subject.)

E.g., j\R� bwj�ñ q M¾� S �Ü�� ghq bwj�ñ q M¾�S

(Rāma is a son of Daśaratha. Lak:ma=a is also a son of Daśaratha.)

�a – as though, like

E.g., b Zabt� R½Í� �a abhlS (Devadatta talks as though he is confused.)

dZl ` – if

E.g., q\q � ijPhl d Zl ` Qji� LhR_hlS (If you do the Pāpa, you will go to Naraka.)


155

gës derived from [\l M

When there is more than one action done by the same il\ f (agent) in a sentence, the

last action has to be told by hlmc-qbR ` (verb). Other actions, which happen chronologically

before the last action, can be told by gë words derived from the [\l M of the action and the

suffix “ì\ [tvā]”.

For example, in the sentence “Having remembered a verse, he knows the meaning.”,

the action of remembering takes place before knowing. Thus, the first action is told by

suffixing ì\ to the [\l M �s (to remember), resulting in “�sì\ (having remembered)”, and the

action of knowing is told by hlmcqbR `, “oP[hl (he knows)”.

Note that each action can take its own iR f, ij�, gh[ij�, etc.

Flow of time Having remembered a verse, &PiR ` 2/1 �sì\ 0

He knows the meaning. g� fR ` 2/1 oP[hl III/1

• Action which takes place before the main action = remembering of verse

= [\l M� + |�e� “ì\ [tvā]”

= �s + ì\

= �sì\ [sm6tvā] (remembering, having remembered)

• The main action = knowing of the meaning

= [\l M� + hlm-|�e

= o M[ ` + hl

= oP[hl (he knows.)

� When the [\l M takes �qnL f, the suffix ì\ is replaced by “e”.

E.g., gQ M + ^½ (to experience) + e = gQ M ½e (having experienced)

E.g., �q + LR ` (to approach) + e = �qL¸ (having approached)

� If the [\l M ends with ×² (short vowel), the extra letter l ` is added after the [\l M.

E.g., | + ³ M (to start) + l ` + e = |³M� (having started)

E.g., ha + �s (to forget) + l ` + e = ha�s� (having forgotten)


156

The following is a list of ì\-ending gës.

• ^½ (1P) to be + ì\ = ^½ì\ (having become)

o gQ M + ^½ (to experience) + e = gQ M ½e (having experienced)

• LR ` (1P) to go + ì\ = Lì\ (having gone)

o �q + LR ` (to approach) + e = �qL¸ (having approached)

o ga + LR ` (to understand) + e = gaL¸ (having understoood)

• �\ (9P) to know + ì\ = �\ì\ (having known)

o ha + �\ (to know) + e = ha�\e (having known)

• is (8U) to do + ì\ = is ì\ (having done)

o gh[ + is (to be entitled to, to refer to) + e = gh[is � (having made a topic of)

• �s (1P) to remember + ì\ = �sì\ (having remembered)

o ha + �s (to forget) + e = ha�s� (having forgotten)

• ns} ` (6P) to create + ì\ = nsA\ [s6:;vā] (having created)

o ha + ns} ` (to release) + e = hans¥ (having released)

• áw ` (1P) to see + ì\ = áA\ [d6:;vā] (having seen)

• �} ` (1P) to give up + ì\ = �B\ [tyaktvā] (having given up)

• ^ M} ` (7U) to eat, experience + ì\ = ^ MB\ [bhuktvā] (having eaten, having experienced)

• RQ ` (4A) to consider + ì\ = Rì\ (having considered)

• zQ ` (2P) to destroy + ì\ = zì\ (having destroyed)

• hab (2P) to know + ì\ = hahbì\ (having known)

Assignment on gës derived from [\l M



157

gës derived from nafQ\Rs

The following are |�es and their meanings, which are suffixed to certain na fQ\Rs to

create gës.

ln ` [tas] – in the sense of 5th case ending

• eb + ln ` = el� – from which, because (same as e�\l)

• lb + ln ` = ll� – from that, therefore, because of that (same as l�\l)

E.g., el� 0 ak fhl III/1 ll� 0 hl�\hR III/1 S (Because it rains, thus I stay.)

• vlb + ln ` = gl� – from this, therefore, because of this (same as vl�\l)

• hiR ` + ln ` = iMl� – from where, why, because of what (same as i�\l)

• naf + ln ` = na fl� – on all sides, everywhere (same as na f�\l)

¾ [tra] – in the sense of 7th case ending

• eb + ¾ = e¾ – where (to make a relative clause), (same as eh�Q)

• lb + ¾ = l¾ – there (same as lh�Q)

• vlb + ¾ = g¾ – here (same as vlh�Q)

E.g., e¾ 0 e¾ 0 [½R� 1/1 l¾ 0 l¾ 0 ah � 1/1 S (Wherever smoke is, there is fire.)22

• �bR ` + ¾ = �z – here (same as gh�Q)

• hiR ` + ¾ = iM¾, C – where (same as ih�Q)

b\ – in the sense of 7th case ending, limited to the sense of time

• eb + b\ = eb\ – which time (to make a relative clause), (same as eh�Q ` i\�Z)

• lb + b\ = lb\ – that time (same as lh�Q ` i\�Z)

• naf + b\ = na fb\, nb\ – all the time, always (na fh�Q ` i\�Z)

�\ – showing a manner

• eb + �\ = e�\ – just as (same as e ZQ |i\jZ�)

• lb + �\ = l�\ – in that manner (same as l ZQ |i\jZ�)

E.g., e�\ 0 �z 0 l�\ 0 gR M¾ 0 S (Just like here, in the same manner there.)

• hiR ` + �\ = i�R ` – in which manner, how (same as iZ Q |i\jZ�)

22 When a word is repeated twice, it can be an indication of covering everything.


158

Any declined form of hiR ` + hdl/dQ = indefinite pronoun

� hdl ` and dQ are indeclinable particles used with declined forms of hiR ` in all genders,

cases, and numbers, and any derived word of hiR `, to convey indefinite sense.

E.g., ihÝl/iÝQ (i� m/1/1 + hdl/dQ) LÛhl S Someone goes.

E.g., hihrl/hirQ (hiR ` n/1/1 + hdl/dQ) [QR ` gh³ S There is some money.

E.g., iZ hdl/iZdQ (iZ m/1/3 + hdl/dQ) }Q\� abhc S Some people say.

E.g., nc Mó� e ZQ iZ Qhdl/iZ QdQ (iZ Q n/3/1 + hdl/dQ) S Happy with whatever.

E.g., iñhdl/iñdQ (iñ m/6/1 + hdl/dQ) [QRS Wealth of somebody.

E.g., iñ\hrl/iñ\rQ (iñ\R ` f/7/1 + hdl/dQ) Q\Le\ fRS In some city.

E.g., i�hrl/i�rQ (i�R ` 0 + hdl/dQ) n MÆ� �^lZ S He somehow gains happiness.

E.g., ihÝl/iÝQ Q LÛhl S Somebody does not go./Anybody does not go./Nobody goes.

E.g., iMlhÝl/iMlÝQ Q ho^ Zhl S He is not afraid of anything.

Assignment on gës derived from na fQ\R


Appendix

159

Preview of Volume 3 - Derivatives (qraste� [pañcavttaya7])

qraste� = five types of asht�

asht� = single word which has the meaning of two words

1. nQ\xc[\l M-asht� (A new root derived from a root or a noun)

[\l M�/n MocR ` + nQ\hb|�e� = new [\l M� called nQ\xc[\l M�

• R Md ` (to liberate) + nQ ` (to desire) = R MR M¦ (to desire to liberate)

From the new [\l M “R MR M¦”, R MR M¦ M�, R MR M¦\, etc., are derived.

• î\ (to stay) + h�d ` (to cause something/someone do) = î\hq (to cause to stay)

From the new [\l M “î\hq”, î\qehl, î\qe, î\qheì\, î\qQR `, etc., are derived.

2. is l-asht� (A new nominal base derived from a root)

[\l M� + is l-|�e� = new |\hlqhbiR ` called is bcR `

• is (to do) + lsd ` (agent of action) = ils f (doer)

• gn ` (to be) + wls¢ (agent of present action) = nl ` (one who is being)

• is (to do) + D l (object of past action) = is l (that which is done)

• �\ (to know) + � M� (gQ) (instrument of action) = �\Q (means of knowing)

• wi (to be able) + hpQ ` (hl) (action itself) = whp (ability)

3. lhul-asht� (A new nominal base derived from a nominal base)

|\hlqhbiR ` + lhul|�e� = new |\hlqhbiR ` called lhul\cR `

• [slj\E + (of Dh6tarā:;ra) + g� ` (g) (descendant) = [\l fj\E (descendant of Dh6tarā:;ra)

• vi + (of one) + ì (ì) (status) = viì (oneness)

• haj\L + (of virāga) + _Ê ` (e) (status) = a �j\�e (vairāgya)

• ^L + (bhaga) + Rl M¢q ` (Rl) (one who has) = ^Lal ` (bhagavat)

• ePL+ (yoga) + �hQ ¢ (�Q) (one who has) = ePhLQ ` (yogin)

Appendix

160

4. nR\n-asht� (A new nominal base derived by compounding nouns)

n MocR ` (q½a fqbR) + n MocR ` (�tjqbR) = new |\hlqhbiR ` called nR\nasht�

1. gë�^\a-nR\n� (Type A)

o The meaning of q½a fqbR ` has predominance. (q½a fqb-g� f-|[\QR)

o The compound word is gë.

• whpR ` (capacity) gQhl�¸ (not exceeding) e�\whp (in keeping with one’s capacity)

S e�\ is in the sense of “in keeping with”.

2. lF MNk-nR\n� (Type T)

o The meaning of �tjqbR ` has predominance. (�tjqb-g� f-|[\QR)

o Gender and number of the compound are the ones of the �tjqb.

• L MjP� (of teacher) iM�� (home) L MNiM�R ` (gurukula)

3. oèG�hz-nR\n� (Type B)

o The meaning of gøqbR ` (a word other than the two) has predominance. (gøqb-

g� f-|[\QR)

o Gender and number of the compound are the ones of the gøqb.

• q�lR ` (yellow) g�j� (clothes) eñ (for whom) n� q�l\�j� ha«M� S

4. �H-nR\n� (Type D)

o The meanings of both words have equal predominance. (�êqb-g� f-|[\QR)

o Gender of the compound is the gender of the last word. Number of the

compound is the total number of the items in the compound.

• q\a fl� d qjRZ�j� d q\a fl�qjRZ�jÂ S j\RÝ n�l\ d n�l\j\RÂ or j\Rn�l Z S

5. viwZk-asht� (A new nominal base derived by keeping one word out of many)

• R\l\ (mother) d hql\ (father) d hqljÂ (parents), R\l\hqljÂ (mother and father) a\ S

• j\RÝ j\RÝ j\RÂ S ; j\RÝ j\RÝ j\RÝ j\R\� S

q½a fqbR ` + �tjqbR `


q½a fqbR ` + �tjqbR ` gøqbR `


Exercises

161

Exercise #1 – �� (present tense) il fhj (active voice) with 1P [\l Ms

Common information

�i\j� (tense/mood) : �� (present tense)

|ePL� (voice) : il fhj|ePL� (active voice)

hlmc� qbR `

(verb)

Information of

[\l M

Information of hlm-|�e (verbal suffix) English

translation person / number q MNk�/adQR `

âhl III/1 ^½ (1P) to exist 3rd person/singular |�Rq MNk�/viadQR ` He is

ik fhc

LÛhn

djhc

}�ahl

QR\hR

qlhc

qæehl

hl�hc

�j\hR

qË�

Qe\hR

LÛ\hR

qæehc

}�a\hR

an\R�

�jhc

qËl�

Exercises

162

Exercise #2 – [\l MiPw� (dictionary of roots)

Consult [\l MiPw and find appropriate [\l M according to the forms given in the list.

hlmc� qbR `

(verb)

Information of [\l M Information of hlm-|�e (verbal suffix) English

translation person / number q MNk�/adQR `

gd\ fR� I/3 gd `f (1P) to worship 1st person/plural �tRq MNk�/oèadQR ` We worship

�khc

Æ\bhn

d�hl

}ehn

}q\R�

lql�

ljhl

bzhc

[\a��

qd\hR

hqohl q\ (1P) to drink

IR�

G}\hR

abhn

az\hR

wPdhc

zjhl

znhn

Exercises

163

Exercise #3 - [\l M with �qnL f in the second part of [\l MiPw�

with �qnL f meaning with �qnL f III/1 Translation

^½ (1P) to be gQ M + ^½ to experience gQ M ahl He experiences

nR ` + ^½

LR ` (1P) to go ga + LR `

� + LR `

gh^ + LR `

gh[ + LR `

dj (1P) to go � + dj

| + dj

an ` (1P) to dwell hQ + an `

�q + an `

�s (1P) to remember ha + �s

o M[ ` (1P) to know | + o M[ `

nR ` + o M[ `

ab (1P) to speak gQ M + ab

|hl + ab

nR ` + ab

G} ` (1P) to go qhj + G} `

ü (1U) to take away qhj + ü

�b + � + ü

R Mz (4P) to be confused ha + R Mz

nR ` + R Mz

hbw ` (6U) to show �q + hbw `

haw ` (6P) to enter �q + haw `

| + haw `

�q ` (5P) to pervade | + �q `

is (8U) to do gQ M + is

�q + is

�\ (9P) to know ha + �\

Exercises

164

Exercise #4 – ��Q Zqb� [\l Ms

Verb [\l M� Translation Verb [\l M� Translation

�^cZ III/3 �^ ` (1A) to obtain They obtain. }\el Z

�¦ Z }\ecZ

o\[cZ b��lZ

RPbl Z qxlZ

RPbZ qxcZ

elcZ o M®n Z

jR\RzZ o M®\RzZ

jR Z RønZ

al fl Z RøZ

al fcZ RølZ

n Zal Z e M®Z� Z

n Zan Z haxlZ

w�nZ haxcZ

�^ Z hax Zl Z

�^\azZ ns¥lZ

wP^ Zl Z g�lZ

nzßZ ÑzlZ

el Z� Z v}\azZ

i\wlZ v[l Z

i\wn Z Ç�l Z

^\kn Z d ZócZ

^\kßZ becZ

alùl Z �Pin Z

�¦cZ a[ fl Z

n ZacZ ÷ÃlZ

jRcZ qdlZ

w�\RzZ e}\RzZ

el\RzZ n½el Z

Exercises

165

Exercise #5 – [\l M with �qnL f in the second part of [\l MiPw�

with �qnL f meaning with �qnL f III/1 Translation

�¦ ` (1A) to see qhj + �¦ `

nR ` + �¦ `

|hl + �¦ `

^\k ` (1A) to speak |hl + ^\k `

R Mb (1A) to rejoice | + R Mb

gQ M + R Mb

jR ` (1A) to play, rejoice gh^ + jR `

�q + jR `

asl ` (1A) to be ghl + asl `

gQ M + asl `

hQ + asl `

| + asl `

ha + hQ + asl `

w� (1A) to doubt � + w�

j^ ` (1A) to begin � + j^ `

n Za ` (1A) to serve �q + n Za `

}Q ` (4A) to be born �q + }Q `

gh^ + }Q `

RQ ` (4A) to consider gh^ + RQ `

qb (4A) to gain �q + qb

|hl + qb

nR ` + qb

Exercises

166

Exercise #6 – iR fh� |ePL� (passive voice)

[\l M� III/1 Translation III/3 Translation

qË (1P) to study qlZ It is studied. qcZ They are studied.

LR `

áw `

QR `

Q�

gn ` (4P)

q Mk `

w Mk `

�k ` (6P)

hbw `

h�Æ `

�\ (9P)

�q ` (5P)

�¦ `

o\[ `

�^ `

w�

n Za `

ad ` ��lZ

ga + LR `

gh[ + LR `

�q + LR `

�q + hbw `

gQ M + ^½

�q + �^ `

� + w�

ha + �\

| + �q `

Exercises

167

Exercise #7 – Other �i\js than ��

Identify verbs in the following:

h��

1. a\}�an� na fa Zbn� bbÂ S (i ±.±)

2. �u\ lR ` �haaZw S (i ±.¶)

3. l½«; o^½o z S (¶.J)

4. [^� �] wK� b�Â S (±.±¶)

5. R\[a� q\ÙÌa� d wKÂ |b�l M� S (±.±À)

6. wK\Q ` b� M� S (±.±L)

7. aZb¨\n� l� [R fR ` �qhQoo� S

8. g} MfQ� e Mu\l ` �qjj\R, qj[R¬ d |aasl Z S

9. hw_� Q hadd\� S

10. n� }L} f d S

11. aN�� hqljR ` �qnn\j S (l � º.±)

��

1. Q ge� ^hal\ S

2. l�\l ` gø� RZ h|elj� Q ^hal\ S(±L.MJ)

3. lb\ hQaùb� Lc\hn S

�s�

1. �l� ahb_\hR S

2. i�� R\� b\ñhn S (i ±.À)

3. hi� ihj_hl S (i ±.À)

4. Q ePN Z S (¶.J)

5. �b� R Z ^ha_hl S (±M.±º)

6. ì\R ` �lZ naù Q ^ha_hc S (±±.º±)

7. ae� Q ^ha_\R� S (¶.±¶)

8. gz� i�� ePN\hR S (¶.À)

9. ìR ` �R� [¸¬ nO\R� Q ihj_hn S

10. ì� q\qR ` ga\�hn S

11. Rz\j�\� R�ñcZ S

12. ì� e\ñhn S

13. o@Q ` ahb_hc S

14. ²L¬ |\�hn S

15. Rz; ^P�nZ S

16. iRfo�� |z\ñhn S

17. o Mhu� ¨hllhj_hl S

18. eb\ o Mhu� hQÝ�\ î\ñhl lb\ ePLR ` ga\�hn S

19. gz�\j\l ` Q �P_hn S

20. lZ hzl� a�\hR S

21. e� �R� qjR� L MôR ` gh^[\ñhl n� R\R ` v_hn S

22. la adQ� ihj_Z S

�P�

1. gal M R\R ` S

2. hQ� �L MÙeP â\} MfQ S

3. nZQeP� �êP� R®Z R Z j�� î\qe S (±.¶±)

4. q\� f vl\Q ` nRaZl\Q ` iM´Q ` qæe S (±.¶Ä)

5. �ht� qjcq S (¶.º)

6. l\Q ` hlhl¦² ^\jl S

Exercises

168

7. lb hahu S

8. �R\� þ� M S

9. e M®² ^\jl S

10. wj�R ` gh¡Û S

11. ePL\e e M¥² S

12. e� ZÛhn l�\ iMN S

13. i\¸Z Rhl� qhj�¥l\R ` S

14. hQ}Lsz\l ` l½�¬ hahQL f l\R ` S

�m

1. n�Râl ` S

2. lbZa\Q M|\hawl ` S

3. nP¿Røl S (iP ±.¶)

4. �bR ` gy Z �n�l ` S

5. g�hl�l ` S

6. bZa\� ge}c S

7. g�\� g}\ec S

8. |\�\l ` a\e M� g}\el S

9. [Rf¦ Z¾ Z nRaZl\� e Me M�a� hiR ` giMa fl S (±.±)

10. j\}\ adQR ` g£a�l ` S (±.¶)

11. wK\� gOzøc S (±.±º)

12. n� w{� l MR M�� gâl ` S (±.±º)

13. g} MfQ� vaR ` �B\ j�PqîZ �q\hawl ` S (±.ÀQ)

14. ìR ` gwP�\Q ` g¡wPd� S

hah[h�m

1. ��\Q� jh�Q� hax\l ` S

2. vll ` i�� ha}\Q�e\l ` S

3. nR\n� is ì\ �a�� iMe\ fl ` S

4. [gz�] ^PL\Q ` ^ M¼�e S (¶.Ä)

5. [ae�] }eZR S

6. [l Z] Q� }eZe M� S

7. el ` � Ze� ñ\l ` ll ` £½hz S

8. n� hi� |^\k Zl, hiR ` �n�l, hi� G}Zl S

9. gz� � Ze� �� Me\R ` S

10. [Rf� jh¦l� ñ\l ` S

11. gzR ` �ó� ñ\R ` S

12. e Mp� RøZl S

13. e�\ l¾ alùjQ ` l�\ l¾ alù�\� S

14. iP jRZl S

15. a³M �q�OZl S

16. oè ñ\R ` S

17. na¬ qsh�¨\� bzZeR ` S

�w�h�fm

1. RP¦P R Z ^½e\l ` S

2. gRslñ [\j�� ^½e\nR ` S

�m

1. �a�l ` R\R ` S

2. [ì�] ª�S � R\ � LR� S (¶.º)

3. [ì�] iR fÐ�zZl M� R\ ^½� S

4. R\ w Md� S

5. �R� n�a\bR ` g�ÂkR ` S

6. �lRa\hbkR ` S

Exercises

169

Exercise #8 – |�R\ ha^hp� (first case) in il fhj |ePL� (active voice)

Parse each sentence in the list below following the steps explained below:

1) Mark each word of the sentence.

E.g., j\R� 1/1 LÛhl III/1 S

2) Give details of each verb and noun in this format.

hlmc� qbR ` (verb) – LÛhl

• [\l M� (root) - LR ` to go

• hlm-|�e� (verbal suffix) – �� (present tense)/il fhj-|ePL� (Active voice)/III/1

n Moc� qbR ` (noun) – j\R�

• |\hlqhbiR ` (nominal base) - j\R (gi\j\c� q M�h��, a-ending masculine)

• n Mq-|�e� (nominal suffix) – 1 (|�R\ ha^hp�, first case) /1 (viadQR `, singular)

• ha^hp-g� f� (meaning of the case) – il fhj |�R\ (1st case in the sense of il\ f) to LÛhl

3) Translate the sentence into English.

E.g., Rāma goes.

1. q MNkÂ QRl� S

2. }Q\� }�ahc S

3. }�a� qæehl S

4. bZaÂ Qel� S

5. q M¾\� qËhc S

6. Ç�� qlhl S

7. as¦Â hl�l� S

8. �Pi\� âhc S

9. bZabt� gñhl S

10. bZz\� Qæehc S

11. bZa\� l M_hc S

12. }�a� �Ûhl S

13. �d\e\ f� �qhbwhc S

14. hw_\� qsÛhc S

15. q M¾\� h�Æhc S

16. ��j� ns}hl S

17. ^ Zb� gh³ S

18. n��Â ³� S

19. }Q\� nhc S

20. bZabt� ijPhl S

21. }�a\� iMa fhc S

22. q MNk� }\Q\hl S

23. }Q\� }\Qhc S

24. }�a� ��Phl S

25. d§� i\wlZ S

26. bZa\� RPbcZ S

27. q MNk\� elcZ S

28. �Pi\� al fcZ S

29. hw_\� n ZacZ S

30. bZz\� }\ecZ S

31. bZabt� RølZ S

32. ^PL\� haxcZ S

Exercises

170

Exercise #9 – |�R\ ha^hp� (first case) in iR fh� |ePL� (passive voice)

Parse each sentence in the list below following the steps explained below:


E.g., j\R� 1/1 áæel Z III/1 S


hlmc� qbR ` (verb) – áæelZ

• [\l M� (root) - áw ` (1P) to see

• hlm- |�e� (verbal suffix) – �� (present tense)/iRfh�-|ePL� (Passive voice)/III/1




• ha^hp-g� f� (meaning of the case) – iR fh� |�R\ (1st case in the sense of iR f) to áæelZ


E.g., Rāma is seen.

1. q MNkÂ Q¸Zl Z S

2. a Zb\� qcZS

3. bZw\� is _cZ S

4. n�� o M®lZ S

5. bZz\� q M_cZ S

6. z³Â w M_Zl Z S

7. �\L� �_lZ S

8. a Zb\� �qhbæecZ S

9. }�a� R M�lZ S

10. as¦� ÷sæel Z S

11. ^ Zb� �\el Z S

12. ^PL\� �\ecZ S

13. bZz� ��lZ S

14. �Pi\� |\�cZ S

15. Ç�Â �� Zl Z S

16. ^ Zb� o\®lZ S

17. bZz� �OlZ S

18. ^ ZbÂ �wT Zl Z S

19. bZa\� n Z cZ S

Exercises

171

Exercise #10 – h�l�e\ ha^hp� (second case)

j\R� 1/1 �d\e fR ` 2/1 gQ M 0 y\RR ` 2/1 LÛhl III/1 S

hlmc� qbR ` (verb) – LÛhl

• [\l M� (root) - LR ` (1P) to go

• hlm- |�e� (verbal suffix) – �� (present tense)/il fhj-|ePL� (Active voice)/III/1




• ha^hp-g� f� (meaning of the case) – il fhj |�R\ (1st case in the sense of il\ f) to LÛhl

n Moc� qbR ` (noun) – y\RR `

• |\hlqhbiR ` (nominal base) - y\R (gi\j\c� q M�h��, a-ending masculine)

• n Mq-|�e� (nominal suffix) – 2 (h�l�e\ ha^hp�, 2nd case) /1 (viadQR `, singular)

• ha^hp-g� f� (meaning of the case) - iR fh� h�l�e\ (2nd case in the sense of iR f) to LÛhl

n Moc� qbR ` (noun) – gQ M (gë-qbR `, indeclinable)

• |\hlqhbiR ` (nominal base) – gQ M

n Moc� qbR ` (noun) – �d\e fR `

• |\hlqhbiR ` (nominal base) - �d\e f (gi\j\c� q M�h��, a-ending masculine)


• ha^hp-g� f� (meaning of the case) – Non-i\ji-ha^hp� connected to “gQ M”

Translation: Rāma goes to the village following the teacher.

1. q MNkÂ �d\e¬ QRl� S

2. q M¾\� a ZbÂ qËhc S

3. j\R� y\R� LÛhl S

4. hw_\� &Pi\Q ` �jhc S

5. }�a\� bZz\Q ` q M_hc S

6. q MNk� y\R� |hl LÛhl S

7. hw_\� bZa\Q ` |hl &PiÂ abhc S

8. hw_\� �d\e fR ` gQ M a Zb\Q ` abhc S

9. bZabt� as¦� |hl Ç�R ` gñhl S

10. }Q\� |\�R ` gcjZ� Q }�ahc S

11. q M¾Â n½e fR ` �¦ Zl Z S

12. }�a\� bZz\Q ` �^cZ S

13. hw_\� �d\e¬ n ZacZ S

14. �d\e f� �qbZwR ` gQ M

^ Zb\Q ` o\[l Z S

Exercises

172

Exercise #11 – lsl�e\ ha^hp� (third case)

j\R� 1/1 z³ZQ 3/1 Ç�R ` 2/1 ÷swhl III/1 S

hlmc� qbR ` – ÷swhl

• [\l M� (root) – ÷sw ` (6P) to touch

• hlm- |�e� (verbal suffix)- �� (present tense)/il fhj-|ePL� (active voice)/III/1



• n Mq-|�e� (nominal suffix) – 1 (|�R\ ha^hp�, 1st case) /1 (viadQR `, singular)

• ha^hp-g� f� (meaning of the case) – il fhj |�R\ (1st case in the sense of il\ f) to ÷swhl

n Moc� qbR ` (noun) – Ç�R `

• |\hlqhbiR ` (nominal base) - Ç� (gi\j\c� q M�h��, a-ending masculine)


• ha^hp-g� f� (meaning of the case) – iR fh� h�l�e\ (2nd case in the sense of iR f) to ÷swhl

n Moc� qbR ` (noun) – z³ZQ

• |\hlqhbiR ` (nominal base) - z³ (gi\j\c� q M�h��, a-ending masculine)

• n Mq-|�e� (nominal suffix) – 3 (lsl�e\ ha^hp�, 3rd case) /1 (viadQR `, singular)

• ha^hp-g� f� (meaning of the case) – ij�Z lsl�e\ (3rd case in the sense of ij�) to ÷swhl

Translation: Rāma touches the pot by the hand.

1. bZabt� z³\O\� Ç�R ` gñhl S

2. bZa\� b Zz�� Pi\Q ` gQ M ahc S

3. bZabt� z³ZQ Ç�� ns}hl S

4. Ç�� bZabtZQ z³\O\� gñlZ S

5. �Pi\� bZa �� b Zz�� gQ M ½ecZ S

6. Ç�� bZabtZQ z³ZQ ÷sæel Z S

7. q MNk� q M¾\O\� nz y\R� LÛhl S

8. bZz\� L M� �� nz al fcZ S

9. �Pi\� ^PL �� nz gQ M ½ecZ S

Exercises

173

Exercise #12 – dl M�� ha^hp� (fourth case)

bZabt� 1/1 q M¾\e 4/1 b ZwR ` 2/1 bb\hl III/1 S

hlmc� qbR ` – bb\hl

• [\l M� – b\ (3U) to give

• hlm- |�e� – ��/il fhj-|ePL�/III/1

n Moc� qbR ` – bZabt�

• |\hlqhbiR ` - b Zabt (gi\j\c� q M�h��)

• n Mq-|�e� – 1 (|�R\ ha^hp�) /1 (viadQR)

• ha^hp-g� f� – il fhj |�R\ to bb\hl

n Moc� qbR ` – bZwR `

• |\hlqhbiR ` – bZw (gi\j\c� q M�h��)

• n Mq-|�e� – 2 (h�l�e\ ha^hp�) /1 (viadQR)

• ha^hp-g� f� – iR fh� h�l�e\ to bb\hl

n Moc� qbR ` – q M¾\e

• |\hlqhbiR ` – q M¾ (gi\j\c� q M�h��)

• n Mq-|�e� – 4 (dl M�� ha^hp�, 4th case) /1 (viadQR)

• ha^hp-g� f� – n�b\Q Z dl M�� (4th case in the sense of n�b\Q) to bb\hl •

Translation: Devadatta gives the land to son.

1. j\R� hwa\e aZb\Q ` bb\hl S

2. q MNk� bZa\O\� &Pi� abhl S

3. q M¾� �\Le G}hl S

4. bZabt� }Q ZO� �qijPhl S

5. is «� y\R\e j\R Z� nz LÛhl S

6. }�a� ^PL\e bZzR ` ��Phl S

7. hw_Â RP¦\e aZb\Q ` qËl� S

8. d§n½e\ fO\� QR� S

9. �d\eùO� QR� S

10. }Q ZO� ²h³ S

11. aN�\e ²\z\ S

Exercises

174

Exercise #13 – qrR� ha^hp� (fifth case)

bZabt� 1/1 as¦\l ` 5/1 qlhl III/1 S

hlmc� qbR ` – qlhl

• [\l M� – (1P) ql ` to fall


n Moc� qbR ` – bZabt�

• |\hlqhbiR ` - b Zabt (gi\j\c� q M�h��)


• ha^hp-g� f� – il fhj |�R\ to qlhl

n Moc� qbR ` – as¦\l `

• |\hlqhbiR ` – as¦ (gi\j\c� q M�h��)

• n Mq-|�e� – 5 (qrR� ha^hp�, 5th case) /1 (viadQR)

• ha^hp-g� f� – gq\b\Q Z qrR� (5th case in the sense of gq\b\Q) to qlhl

Translation: Devadatta falls from the tree.

1. }Q\� d§\l ` hQal fcZ S

2. Ç�� z³\O\� qlhl S

3. }Q\� y\R ZO� �LÛhc S

4. }�a� bZz\l ` b Zz� |\�Phl S

5. aZb\� �d\e\ fl ` hw_�� \ecZ S

6. �\L\l ` RP¦� �OlZ S

7. ^PL ZO� bZa� l M_hl S

8. �\L\l ` |\i ^PL\� nhc S

9. ��j\l ` gø� Q gh³ S

10. n½e\ fl ` d§� h^� âhlS

11. q MNk� q M¾�/q M¾ Z�/q M¾\l ` haQ\ LÛhl S

12. bZabt� q M¾Â/q M¾\O\� qs�i anhl S

13. |\�\Q/|\� ��/|\� ZO� qs�i q MNk� Q }�ahlS

14. aZb\� �d\e¬/�d\eù�/�d\e\ fl ` haQ\ Q �\ecZ S

Exercises

175

Exercise #14 – k�� ha^hp� (sixth case)

bZabtñ 6/1 q M¾� 1/1 &Pi\Q ` 2/3 �jhl III/1 S

hlmc� qbR ` – �jhl

• [\l M� – �s (1P) to remember

• hlm- |�e� - ��/il fhj-|ePL�/III/1

n Moc� qbR ` – q M¾�

• |\hlqhbiR ` - q M¾ (gi\j\c� q M�h��)


• ha^hp-g� f� - il fhj |�R\ to �jhl

n Moc� qbR ` – bZabtñ

• |\hlqhbiR ` – bZabt (gi\j\c� q M�h��)

• n Mq-|�e� – 6 (k�� ha^hp�, 6th case) /1 (viadQR)

• ha^hp-g� f� – n��-k�� to q M¾

n Moc� qbR ` – &Pi\Q `

• |\hlqhbiR ` – &Pi (gi\j\c� q M�h��)

• n Mq-|�e� – 2 (h�l�e\ ha^hp�) /3 (oèadQR)

• ha^hp-g� f� – iR fh� h�l�e\ to �jhl

Translation: The son of Devadatta remembers verses.

1. �i\wñ L M�� w{� al fl Z S

2. }�aZ�jeP� ^ Zb� o\®lZ S

3. z³eP� bZa� �§� âhl S

4. bZa\Q\R ` �w� bZa Zw� ��lZ S

5. b Zabtñ q M¾Â n½e fR ` �¦ Zl Z S

6. a Zb ZO� bZa\Q\� L M�\� �\ecZ S

7. }Q\Q\� b Zw� }Q �� j�lZ S

8. |\�\Q\� n��\l ` q MNk� }�ahl S

9. î\aj\Q\� hzR\�e� gzR ` gh� S

10. e�\Q\� }qe�P¿h� S

Exercises

176

Exercise #15 – n�R� ha^hp� (seventh case)

j\R� 1/1 LszZ 7/1 hl�hl III/1 S

hlmc� qbR ` – hl�hl

• [\l M� – î\ (1P) to stand, to stay


n Moc� qbR ` – j\R�

• |\hlqhbiR ` - j\R (gi\j\c� q M�h��)


• ha^hp-g� f� – il fhj |�R\ to hl�hl

n Moc� qbR ` – LszZ

• |\hlqhbiR ` – Lsz (gi\j\c� q M�h��)

• n Mq-|�e� – 7 (n�R� ha^hp�, 7th case) /1 (viadQR)

• ha^hp-g� f� – gh[ij�Z n�R� (7th case in the sense of gh[ij�) to hl�hl

Translation: Rāma stays in the house.

1. ^Zb\� �PiZ áæecZ S

2. bZabt� ^ ZbeP� �w�lZ S

3. }�a� ^PL Zk M jRl Z S

4. bZabt� q M¾ñ z³eP� Ç�� qæehl S

5. �\LZ nhl RP¦� haxlZ S

6. q M¾eP� nlP� bZabt� l M_hl S

7. bZzZ q Mó Z gz� q Mó� S bZzZ Qó Z gz� Qó� S

8. |\� Zk M n� M q MNk� }�ahl S

Exercise #16 – gi\j\c� q M¢h*�� na fQ\R-w{� (a-ending masculine pronouns)

Complete the sentence by placing pronouns na f, vi, gø, qj, and q½a f in their declined forms.

E.g., naù 1/3 a Zb\� 1/3 haxcZ III/3 S

1. 1/3 }Q\� 1/3 abhc S

2. 5/1 y\R\l ` 5/1 }Q\� �LÛhc S

3. 7/1 hake Z 7/1 n�� al fl Z S

4. 6/3 b Zz\Q\� 6/3 L M�\� nhcS

5. 1/3 ^ Zb\� 1/3 o\®cZ S

6. 4/1 q MNk\e 4/1 Ç�� bb\hl S

7. 7/1 i\�Z 7/1 q MNk� hl�hl S

Exercise

177

Exercise #17 – Relative pronouns in masculine

e� 1/1 oP[hl III/1 n� 1/1 abhl III/1 S

eb clause – “e� 1/1 oP[hl III/1“

lb clause – “n� 1/1 abhl III/1”

Of eb clause –

hlmc� qbR ` – oP[hl

• [\l M� – o M[ ` (1P) to know


n Moc� qbR ` – e�

• |\hlqhbiR ` - eb (bi\j\c� q M�h�� na fQ\R, d-ending masculine pronoun)


• ha^hp-g� f� – il fhj |�R\ to oP[hl

Of lb clause –

hlmc� qbR ` – abhl

• [\l M� – ab (1P) to speak


n Moc� qbR ` – n�

• |\hlqhbiR ` - lb (bi\j\c� q M�h�� na fQ\R, d-ending masculine pronoun)


• ha^hp-g� f� - il fhj |�R\ to abhl

Translation: One who knows, he speaks.

1. eÂ �Ûl� lÂ LÛl� S

2. eZ QRhc l Z qËhc S

3. e� w�lZ n� |U � q sÛhl S

4. eZ ��j� n ZacZ l Z ^p\� nhc S

5. eh�Q ` naù }Q\� hQanhc n� y\R� âhl S

6. eZQ naù hake\� �qhbæecZ lR ` �d\e¬ QR\hR S

7. e� na fh�Q ` |\�lZ l�� j\e QR� g³MS

8. eZ }Q\� ��j� ^}cZ l Zk\� ePLR ` ��j� azhl S

Exercise

178

Exercise #18 –q M¢h*�� na fQ\R-w{� (masculine pronouns) - lb, eb, vlb, hiR `

Complete the sentence by placing pronouns lb, vlb, hiR ` in declined forms.

E.g., n� 1/1 q MNk� 1/1 RPbl Z III/1 S

1. 1/1 ��j� 1/1 �¦l Z S

2. 1/2 £\¤�Â 1/2 hQanl� S

3. 1/3 }Q\� 1/3 n ZacZ S

4. 2/1 L M�� 2/1 qæehl bZabt�S

5. 2/2 ^ ZbÂ 2/2 }\Q\hl S

6. 2/3 &Pi\Q ` 2/3 }\Q\hl S

7. 3/1 b ZzZQ 3/1 gQ M ahl S

8. 3/2 z³\O\� 3/2 Æ\bhl S

9. 3/3 |\� �� 3/3 }�ahl S

10. 4/1 �d\e\ fe 4/1 QR� S

11. 4/2 b Za\O\� 4/2 QR� S

12. 4/3 }Q ZO� 4/3 ²h³ S

13. 5/1 z³\l ` 5/1 Ç�� qlhl S

14. 6/1 q MNkñ 6/1 q M¾� G}hl S

15. 6/2 }�aeP� 6/2 n�� oP[hl S

16. 6/3 }Q\Q\� 6/3 y\R Z hl�hl S

17. 7/1 b Zw Z 7/1 hQanhl S

18. 7/3 i\�Zk M 7/3 hl�hl S

Exercise #19 – gi\j\c� Qq M�nih�� (a-ending neuter)

1. hR¾� Ð�\hQ Æ\bhl S

2. iR�Z }�Z |i\wZl Z S

3. q�\ fhQ as¦\l ` qlhc S

4. n MÆR ` �h§e �� gQ M ½el Z S

5. hR¾\h� QLj\l ` aQ � |hl LÛhc S

6. w\�\�\� a\»ZO� �\Q � |\�lZ S

7. i\j�ñ L M�� i\eù áæel Z S

8. gZ nhl wj�j� q M_lZ S

Exercise #20 – Qq M�nih�� na fQ\R-w{� (neuter pronouns)

Complete the sentence by placing na f, vi, gø, qj, lb, vlb, and hiR ` in their declined forms.

E.g., na¬ 1/1 }�� 1/1 LÛhl III/1 S

1. 1/1 ý�ÆR ` 1/1 gQ M ½el Z S

2. 1/3 w\�\h� 1/3 gaL¸cZ S

3. 5/1 g\l ` 5/1 wj�j� }\el Z S

4. 6/3 i\e\ f�\� 6/3 i\j�R ` gh³S

5. 7/1 gjÙe Z 7/1 Ð�\hQ al fcZ S

6. 1/3 hR¾\h� 1/3 LÛhc S

7. 4/1 hR¾\e 4/1 a�� bb\hl S

8. 5/1 i\j�\l ` 5/1 n� R MôhlS

9. 6/3 w\�\�\� 6/3 l� � }\Q\hl n�S

10. 7/1 |ij�Z 7/1 vlb a\»� áæel Z S

Exercises

179

Exercise #21 – Relative pronouns in neuter

1. eb gxlZ lb gRS

2. eb Q Z¾\O\� áæel Z lb ´qR ` S

3. e\hQ q¾\h� qlhc l\hQ bz S

4. q MNk� el ` i\e¬ ijPhl l ZQ ��jR ` gd fhl S

5. eZQ Ð�\hQ |\�cZ ll ` n\[QR ` S

6. e�\l ` i\j�\l ` wj�j� }\el Z lñ l� � w\� Z� �\el Z S

7. e �� q MNk� o®lZ l Zk\� ý�Æ\Q\R ` �qwR� �_lZ S

8. eh�Q ` |ij�Z Rz\a\»\hQ nhc ll ` qË\hR S

Exercise #22 – gëR ` (Indeclinables) derived from [\l M

1. }�a\� ²L¬ Lì\ RQ M_�Pi� hQal fcZ S

2. hw_� �d\e fR ` �qL¸ |U � q sÛhl S

3. q MNk� w\�\�\R ` g� fR ` gaL¸ l M_hl jRl Z d S

4. ��jñ l� � �\ì\ n� Q w�lZ S

5. hw_� �d\e fñ �qbZw� ha�\e q MQ� qsÛhl S

6. bZabt� Ç�� is ì\ [Q� �^lZ S

7. }�a\� ²L fR ` gQ M ½e RQ M_�Pi� hawhc S

8. bZa� |�¸ &Pi� h�hÆì\ n� a Zb\Q ` qËhl S

9. q MNk� a �j\�e� |\� gjÙe� LÛhl S

10. q MNk� �\Q ZQ ^ Zb� o\h[ì\ l� � oP[hl S

11. na\ fQ ` &Pi\Q ` �sì\ gø\Q ` d na\ fQ ` ha�s�

hw_� �d\e fR ` gh^LÛhl S

Exercise #23 – gëR ` (Indeclinables) – derived from na fQ\R

1. el� a �j\�eR ` gh³ ll� n� na¬ �}hl S

2. iMl� w\�\h� qËhn S

3. el� �\Q ZQ RP¦� âhl gl� w\�� qË S

4. ��j� na fl� âhl S

5. e¾ [½R� gh³ l¾ ah � gh³ S

6. l¾ va� nhl ll ` n�R ` S

7. g¾ a\»Z �qbZw� gh³ S

8. iM¾ anhn S

9. vl\hQ a\»\hQ iM¾ áæecZ S

10. eb\ bZabt� hR¾\h� qæehl lb\ n� l M_hl S

11. e�\ bZabt� abhl l�\ lñ q M¾� abhl S

12. e�\ �z l�\ gR M¾ S

13. ihÝl ` ý�ÆR ` gQ M ahl S

14. ihÝl ` Q ý�ÆR ` gQ M ahl S

15. g³�hl iZ hdl ` abhc S

16. n� iZ Qhdl ` �V ZQ l M_hl S

17. iñhdl ` Lsz� hawhl S

18. ih��hÝl ` b Zw Z q MNk� hQanhl S

19. bZabt� hihrl ` i\e¬ ijPhl S

20. hirQ a³M gh³ S

21. n� ih��hÝl/iM¾hdl/Chdl/ib\hdl ` Q áæelZ S

22. iMlhÝl ` i\j�\l ` Ç�� qlhl S

23. vll ` i�hrl ` Q �\el Z S

Exercises

180

Exercise #24 – �i\j\c� q M¢h*�� (i-ending masculine)

1. ah � hLhj� bzhlS

2. y'e� h^xcZ S

3. q\�� gh�Q\ bô Zl Z S

4. �hkh^� ihah^� d hLhj� áæelZ S

5. Qsqhl� n\jh�h^� nz hLhj� |hl LÛhl S

6. iha� hah[R ` gQ M ghl�eZ R��Q ` bb\hl S

7. �hkO� QR� S

8. ¨\[ Z� Qsqhl� ghl��Q ` Q qæehl S

9. Qsql Z� ghn� q\h�O\� qlhl S

10. el�Q\� hah[� gh³ S

11. hLjÂ ah � gh³ [½R\l ` S

12. lZk M hLhjk M iqe� anhc S

Exercise #25 – �i\j\c� q M¢h*�� (u-ending masculine)

Exercise #26 – �i\j\c� q M¢h*�� (6-ending masculine)

1. ��j� ha�ñ il\ f d [\l\ d âhl S

2. g®Zl\j� zPl\j� QRhc S

3. +ó\ b\lúQ ` qæehl S

4. RW\� zP¾\ ��cZ S

5. b\¾ Z QR� S

6. n�b\eils fOP QR� S

7. il\ f ^PpM � gø� Q âhlS

8. +óM� ²´q� +E\ áæel Z S

9. ilú f�\� hah[� gh³ S

10. il fhj nhl ^Pp\ ghq haxlZ S

Exercise #27 – �i\j\c� ��h�� (ā-ending feminine)

1. �\Q Z hQ�\ âhl S

2. RP¦ Z R MR M¦½�\R ` �Û\ gh³ S

3. hake\� hQ+e\ Q gQ M ½ecZ S

4. j\R� is qe\ n Za\� ijPhl S

5. bZabt� �ue\ �Ûe\ d bZal\e � R\�\� bb\hl S

6. L�\e\� }�R ` �Qel M S

7. nZQ\� L Mz\e\� anhc S

8. h}�\n\e\� n�\� �u\ �_lZ S

1. o�M� o\èO\� qw M� azhl S

2. n\[ M� ljP� R½�Z R MR M¦ Mh^� nz �qhawhl S

3. R MR M¦a� L MjP� iM�Z hQanhc S

4. iZQ zZl MQ\ hww M� jPhbhl S

5. e� w\�R ` �qhbwhl l�� L Mja Z QR� S

6. Rs�aZ ²\z\ S

7. a\eP� gh�� nµahl S

8. hn�P� |\i qwa� djhc S

9. o�MO� qs�i n\[ M� anhl S

10. naùk\� h}�\n½Q\� n\[½Q\� d L MN� bh¦�\R½hl f� ��lZ S

11. L MjÂ nhl zZl M� R MR M¦ M�\ �\el Z S

12. Rz\o\è� lh�Q ` ¦ Z¾ Z L M Q ` o�½Q ` d �¦lZ S

Exercises

181

Exercise #28 – �i\j\c� ��h�� na fQ\Rw{� (ā-ending feminine pronouns)

Complete the sentence by placing na\ f, vi\, gø\, lb, vlb, and hiR ` in their declined forms.

E.g., na\ f 1/1 hdc\ 1/1 Qæehl III/1 S

1. 2/1 i�\R ` 2/1 abhl S

2. 2/3 i�\� 2/3 abhl S

3. 3/1 n��e\ 3/1 �\el Z S

4. 4/1 b Zal\e � 4/1 QR� S

5. 4/3 b Zal\O� 4/3 QR� S

6. 5/1 hdc\e\� 5/1 wPdhl S

7. 6/1 b Zal\e\� 6/1 n��\� abhlS

8. 6/3 b Zal\Q\R ` 6/3 n��\� abhlS

9. 7/1 bw\e\R ` 7/1 hQ�\ gh³ S

10. 7/3 gaî\n M 7/3 �\QR ` gh³ S

Exercise #29 –��h*�� na fQ\R-w{� (feminine pronouns) - lb, eb, vlb, hiR `

Complete the sentence by placing pronouns lb, vlb, hiR ` in their declined forms.

1. 1/1 b Zal\ 1/1 Q¸lZ S

2. 1/2 n�� Z 1/2 âl� S

3. 1/3 gaî\� 1/3 âhc S

4. 2/1 n ZQ\R ` 2/1 QehlS

5. 2/2 �qRZ 2/2 hbwhl S

6. 2/3 hdc\� 2/3 �}hl S

7. 3/1 �Xe\ 3/1 n ZacZ S

8. 3/2 �qR\O\R ` 3/2 �qhbæelZS

9. 3/3 n��\h^� 3/3 �\el Z S

10. 4/1 b Zal\e � 4/1 QR� S

11. 4/2 b Zal\O\R ` 4/2 QR� S

12. 4/3 |}\O� 4/3 ²h³ S

13. 5/1 h}ë\e\� 5/1 w{� }\el ZS

14. 6/1 h�e\e\� 6/1 |eP}Q� hiRS

15. 6/2 n ZQeP� 6/2 R®Z hl�hl S

16. 6/3 gaî\Q\R ` 6/3 +ó\ gh�S

17. 7/1 L Mz\e\R ` 7/1 hQanhl S

18. 7/3 gaî\n M 7/3 hl�hl S

Exercise #30 – �i\j\c� ��h�� (ī-ending feminine)

1. q\a fl� ha�ñ i¾� âhl S

2. na\ f� }Qø� a\j\�n; LÛhc S

3. qhl� qY\ nz i\æe\� anhl S

4. L\e¾� LÂe\ f nz h�.�; qËhl S

5. bZañ qY � QR� S

6. lñ\� QLe\ f� |\i a\q� gh³ S

7. }QQ� h�.Ùe\� g�¬ oP[hl S

8. LÂe\¬ n�\� hwa� l M_hl S

9. qsh�¨\� QLe f� nhc S

10. zZ b Zha R\� j¦l M S

Exercise

182

Exercise #31 – �i\j\c� ��h�� (i-ending feminine)

1. g|\�ñ |\h�� ePL� ��lZ S

2. na\ f� � Mle� ll ` qb� abhc S

3. e Mahl� hlh�R ` gQ M �qanhl S

4. R Mhp� � M�\ �s�\ e M�\ d o MuÂ |\�lZ S

5. ^hp� R MpeZ âhl S

6. nsó Z� |\i vll ` �n�l ` �hl � Mhl� �z S

7. w\cZ� |\�e Z vl\� ³ Ml�� qËhl S

8. nsó Z� |i\j� � MhlO� gaL¸lZ S

9. ^p\Q\� LlÂ ^�hl� Q gh³ S

10. w\cÂ n�\� ^�l Z� gQ Mqqht� S

11. �Ml Z� d �sl Z� d e MpZ � d vlñ\� �pZ �

�qqhl� �hl hnuR ` S

Exercise #32 – Relative pronouns in feminine

1. e\ bZa� ^½l Zk M R\ls q Z� hl�hl lñ� QR� S

2. e\� Qx� ^\jlbZwZ nhc l\� na\ f� ^La�� S

3. e\� QLj; LÛhl lñ\� hQanhl S

4. ee\ haQ\ �\Q � Q |\�lZ n\ o Mhu� S

5. e\h^� }�a� wPdhl l\n\� hdc\Q\� Q\w� �_lZ S

6. eñ\� h}ë\e\� nj²l� anhl le\ ab\hR S

Exercise #33 – �bR/gbn-w{� (pronoun “idam” and “adas”)

Complete the sentence by placing pronouns �bR ` and gbn ` in their declined forms.

1. 1/1 q MNk� 1/1 gh³ S

2. 1/2 q MNkÂ 1/2 ³� S

3. 1/3 q MNk\� 1/3 nhc S

4. 2/3 �Pi\Q ` 2/3 �}hlS

5. 3/1 q MNk Z� 3/1 a³ M �\el Z S

6. 6/1 q MNkñ 6/1 �\QR ` gh³ S

7. 7/1 hake Z 7/1 had\j� âhl S

8. 1/1 wj�jR ` 1/1 âhl S

9. 1/2 Q Z¾ Z 1/2 ZM jl� S

10. 1/3 ^½l\hQ 1/3 }\ecZ S

11. 3/1 �\Q ZQ 3/1 a³ M �\el Z S

12. 2/1 ¦ Z¾R ` 2/1 �q�^lZ n� S

13. 1/1 ��\hei\ 1/1 âhl S

14. 1/3 b Zal\� 1/3 âhc S

Exercises

183

Exercise #34 – e M b/g�b-w{� (pronoun “yu:mad/asmad”)

1. gz� ì\� qæe\hR S

2. ì� iM¾ hQanhn S

3. �a\� qË\a S

4. ae� l Z ab\R� S

5. e½eR ` �dj� S

6. ì\� qsÛ\hR S

7. ì� R\� ab S

8. n� z QÂ gal M S

9. vlb a\»� Re\ �pR ` S

10. RR �u\ ìe\ áæelZ S

11. gnÂ g�\h^� Q �\el Z S

12. l MO� QR�S

13. Rô� bb\l M S

14. Q� ²h³ S

15. ge� RR q M¾� S

16. la hw_� h}�\n M� S

17. Q� Rhl� e M \h^� Q gOMqL¸lZ S

18. RP¦� R Z ^½e\l ` S

19. g�\i� L MN� QR\R� S

20. e M \i� q¦� Q �qqxlZ S

21. vk� a� R\L f� S

22. RZ[\ Rhe g³M S

23. vll ` ìhe Q �qqxlZ S

24. ìl ` gø� RR h|e� Q gh³ S

Exercise #35 – �i\j\c� q M¢h*�� (=-ending masculine)

1. n ML� ` LÛhl S

2. n ML�� LÛhc S

3. bZabt� n ML�� qsÛhl S

4. n ML�\ ge� áæel Z S

5. bZabt� n ML�Z [Q� bb\hl S

6. n ML�� qs�i bZabt� LÛhl S

7. n ML�� q M¾� gh³ S

8. n MLh� nhl bZabt� hl�hl S

Exercise #36 – l/bi\j\c� q M¢h*��/��h�� (t/d-ending masculine/feminine)

1. nafhal ` na¬ }\Q\hlS

2. �d\e f� �qhQkbR ` �qhbwhl S

3. n½¾^\_is lÂ aÃZ S

4. j\R� n Müb\ nz �qhQkb� qËhl S

5. nafhabZ QR� S

6. Rsb� Ç�� }\el Z S

7. n Müb� q M³i� Qe\hR S

8. �qhb ��j� }Q\Q ` j¦hl S

9. bZabt� ¦ M[\ Q qËhl S

10. n� nhR[� q\�Â �Qehl S

Exercise #37 – d/}i\j\c� q M¢h*��/��h�� (c/j-ending masculine/feminine)

1. a\i |e M¥lZ S

2. n� a\d� abhl S

3. Ç�� ìd\ gQ M ½el Z S

4. bZabt� �hì}Z [Q� bb\hl S

5. �hì}� h^k3� h^\� nhc S

6. ìd� bZa� a\e M� S

7. a\d� hake� ^\k�R ` S

8. a\hd g� f� âhl S

Exercises

184

Exercise #38 – �Q-gc� q M¢h*�� (in-ending masculine)

1. q¦� zh³Q� �qhj hl�hl S

2. ePhLQ� �\hQQ� n ZacZ S

3. naù |\h�Q� n MhÆQ� âcM S

4. l� la a �hj�� qæe S

5. ²\R� a �hjh^� haQ\ }�ahl S

6. vll ` w\�� nR\hnQ\ qlZ S

7. w\h�f� Z QR� S

8. gh[i\hj�� w\h�� aZb\Q ` qËhc S

9. ²\hRQ� is qe\ h}�\na� �\Q � �^cZ S

10. n�n\hj�� |\h�Q\� a �hj�� Q }\Qhc S

11. gh�Q ` zh³hQ nhl qh¦�� jRcZ S

12. zZ ePhLQ ` ì� |\h�Q\� ²\R� S

Exercise #39 – Rl/al-gc� q M¢h*�� (mat/vat-ending masculine)

1. ��R\Q ` Q\j\e�� o MhuRl\� b Za� S

2. [�Rc� zQ MRc� QRhc S

3. hax\ac� zQ MRc� QR\hR S

4. ^LacÂ q MQ� q MQ� QR\R� S

5. ^Lal� ²´q� ^Lal\ ²eR ` �qhbæelZ S

6. �qhQkb\� l\Fe f� o MhuRh[� gaL¸lZ S

7. ��RlZ QR� S

8. hax\al� g�\Q� Q gh³ S

9. o MhuRl\� RlÂ n�we� Q gh³ S

10. ^Lahl gaLlZ nhl n� o MhuR\Q ` âhl S

Exercise #40– wls¢-gc� q M¢h*�� (at of present participle ending masculine)

1. n� ^p� nQ ` iR fePL� ijPhl S

2. lZ ^p\� nc� iR fePL� iMa fhc S

3. bZabt� qdc� nPRbt� qæehl S

4. va� qæel\ ^Lal\ vlb a\»R ` �pR ` S

5. nl� q MNk\l ` iZw� }\el Z S

6. hake\Q ` ®\el� n�� q}\el Z S

Exercise #41 – gQ-gc� q M¢h*�� (an-ending masculine)

1. ��\ vi� S

2. £¤\ bZa\Q\� |�R� nµahl S

3. j\}\ £¤\�� qæehl S

4. w\�f[¡\ q\6\Q � zjhl S

5. ��Q\ ��\QR ` ��hQ qæehl S

6. n� ��Q� RhzR\Q � }\Q\hl S

7. qjR\�Q Z QR� S

8. ��Q� �\QR ` ��\QR ` �� M�lZ S

9. j\�� q MNk� j\}q MNk� S

10. vl Z a�\ f� Ñ \�� hl ��cZ S

11. gæR\Q� gßhQ nhc S

12. ��\ ²Z Rhzh· hl�hl S

13. £¤�� Rhz·\ j\}\ ^½R\Q � �^lZ S

14. q\6\Q � �B\ n� j\�\� j\}\ âhl S

Exercises

185

Exercise #42 – gQ-gc� Qq M�ni�� (an-ending neuter)

1. £¤ vi� âhl S

2. n� £¤ }\Q\hl S

3. o@hQ iR\ fh� a Zb ZQ �\ecZ S

4. ePhLQ� iR f iMa fhc S

5. }�a\� }8\hQ �^cZ S

6. Q iR f�\ Q |}e\ Q [Q ZQ gRslì� âhl S

7. n� bZabt� �hl Q\·\ �\el Z S

8. n� £¤ hahbì\ iR fh^� R M�lZ S

9. £¤�Z QR� S

10. £¤�� gøl ` Q\h³ S

11. £¤�� hax\ £¤hax\ �hl ��lZ S

12. £¤h� hQ�\ £¤hQ�\ �hl ��lZ S

13. iRf�\� hnhuR ` �Ûc� bZal\� e}cZ S

14. iRfh� lñ gh[i\j� gh³ S

15. }�a\� }8hQ }8hQ ý�ÆR ` gQ M ahc S

16. iRfn M b Zabtñ a �j\�e� }\el Z S

Exercise #43 – gn-gc� Qq M�ni�� (as-ending neuter)

Exercise #44 – �k/�k-gc� Qq M�ni�� (i:/u:-ending neuter)

1. ll ` RQ� d�hl S

2. lñ as¦ñ q�\ fhQ ÈÃ\�hn S

3. bZabt� ÈÃ� qËhl S

4. �h§e\h� RQn\ nz al fcZ S

5. vll ` ÈÃPh^� �pR ` S

6. ÈÃn\� ad\�hn �Zen Z âhc S

7. RQn� l Z}� lqn\ �OlZ S

8. vlb �\Q � RQPh^� |\�lZ S

9. RR L MN� hwjn\ QR\hR S

10. RQn� bZal\ d§� S

11. bZal\ RQhn hl�hl S

12. vll ` Lj�e� ad� ÈÃhn haxlZ S

1. lñ d¦ Mk� d§n½e% S

2. ¥Pl;hk |i\wcZ S

3. naùk\� d¦½�hk n½e fb Zale\ qæehc S

4. ^La\Q ` ^p\e �eM� bb\hl S

5. z³\l ` [Q M� ns}hl S

6. ��Q� ¥Phlk\ |i\æel Z S

7. zhah^ f� e}lZ S

8. lñ aq Mk Z g� bb\hl S

9. e} Mk� hnhu� �OlZ S

10. d¦ Mk� d¦ M� S

11. ghd fk� ¥Phl� d¦ MO\¬ qæehl S

12. ll ` ¥Phlk\� ¥Phl� S

13. �eMhk nhl aq M� d�hl S

14. ��Q� ¥Phlhk na fR ` �q�OlZ S

Worksheets for photocopying

186

Worksheet for conjugation

• [\l M� (root) : ( )

• �i\j� (tense/mood) :

• |ePL� (voice) :

• g�R ` (stem) :

• [\l M� (root) : ( )

• �i\j� (tense/mood):

• |ePL� (voice):

• g�R ` (stem)


187


n Mq-|�es (nominal suffixes) modified for neuter

|�R\ (1st case) - /gR ` * � �

h�l�e\ (2nd case) - /gR ` * � �

* The |�e “gR” comes only after g-ending |\hlqhbiR `.

The |�e in this section of the chart is termed na fQ\Rî\Q [sarvanāmasthāna].



adQR ` (Number)

ha^hp�(Case)

viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)

|�R\ (1st case) n ` Ô gn `

h�l�e\ (2nd case) gR ` Ô gn `

lsl�e\ (3rd case) � O\R ` h^n `

dl M�� (4th case) v O\R ` On `

qrR� (5th case) gn ` O\R ` On `

k�� (6th case) gn ` Ón ` �R `

n�R� (7th case) � Ón ` n M

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/3 2/2 2/1

3/3 3/2 3/1

4/3 4/1 4/2

5/3 5/1 5/2

6/3 6/2 6/1

7/3 7/2 7/1

1/1 1/2 1/3

2/3 2/2 2/1


188

Worksheet for declension

|\hlqhbiR ` : Ending letter: h�� ( )


viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)



lsl�e\ (3rd case) j\R Z� j\R\O\R ` j\R ��


qrR� (5th case) j\R\l ` j\R\O\R ` j\R ZO�


n�R� (7th case) j\R Z j\ReP� j\R Zk M


|\hlqhbiR ` : Ending letter: h�� ( )


viadQR ` (Singular)

h�adQR ` (Dual)

oèadQR ` (Plural)



lsl�e\ (3rd case) j\R Z� j\R\O\R ` j\R ��


qrR� (5th case) j\R\l ` j\R\O\R ` j\R ZO�


n�R� (7th case) j\R Z j\ReP� j\R Zk M


1/1 1/2 1/3

2/3

3/3

4/3

5/3

6/3

7/3

S/3

2/2

3/2

4/2

5/2

6/2

7/2

S/2

3/1

2/1

4/1

5/1

6/1

7/1

S/1


189

Worksheet for parsing a sentence



hlmc� qbR ` (verb) –

• [\l M� (root) –

• hlm- |�e� (verbal suffix) – ( )/ / /

n Moc� qbR ` (noun) –

• |\hlqhbiR ` (nominal base) – ( -i\j\c� h��, -ending )

• n Mq-|�e� (nominal suffix) – ( ha^hp�, case) / ( -dQR `, )

• ha^hp-g� f� (meaning of the case) – ( case in the sense of ) to










Visit www.arshaavinash.in

Website for free E-books on Vedanta and Sanskrit

All the E-books available on the website can be downloaded FREE!

PUJYA SWAMI DAYANANDA SARASWATI- A BRIEF BIOGRAPHY BY N. AVINASHILINGAM. It is available in English, Tamil, Hindi, Japanese and Portuguese.

SWAMI PARAMARTHANANDA’S TRANSCRIBED CLASS NOTES: Available class notes are Introduction to Vedanta, Tattva Bodha, Bhagavad Gita (3329 pages), Isavasya Upanisad, Kenopanisad, Kathopanisad, Prasna Upanisad, Mundaka Upanisad, Mandukya Upanisad with karika, Taittiriya Upanisad, Aitareya Upanisad, Chandogya Upanisad, Brihadarnyaka Upanisad (1190 pages), Kaivalya Upanisad, Brahma Sutra (1486 pages), Atma Bodha, Vivekachudamani (2038 pages), Panchadasi, Manisha Panchakam, Upadesha Saara, Saddarsanam, Jayanteya Gita, Jiva Yatra, Advaita Makaranda, Dakshinamurthy Stotram, Drg Drsya Viveka, Niti Satakam, Vairagya Sataka, Naishkarmya Siddhi, etc.

BRNI MEDHA MICHIKA’S BOOKS ON SANSKRIT GRAMMAR: Enjoyable Sanskrit Grammar Books- Basic Structure of Language, Phonetics & Sandhi, Derivatives (Pancavrttayah), Dhatukosah, Astadhyayi, Study Guide to Panini Sutras through Lagu Siddhanta Kaumudi, Sanskrit Alphabet Study Books- Single Letters, Conjunct Consonants.

There are many more books and articles on Yoga, Meditation, Holy chants, Indian culture and Spirituality.

Arsha Avinash Foundation 104 Third Street, Tatabad, Coimbatore 641012, India

Phone: +91 9487373635 E mail: [email protected]

www.arshaavinash.in


mailto:[email protected]


Documents

Enjoyable Sanskrit Grammar Series Volume 1 Basic Structure ... · • Relevant books – Enjoyable Sanskrit Grammar Volume 1 Basic Structure of the Language For derived nominal bases